JP2020114499A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of fueling player's eagerness to play a game by enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the amusement of the game.SOLUTION: In the game machine, an MPU causes a speaker to output a temporarily selected music selectable by player's determination operation on a determination button for selecting a music, and when the determination operation onto the temporarily selected music is performed, the MPU causes the speaker to output the temporarily selected music as a selected music. The MPU causes the speaker to output the temporarily selected music from a chorus portion in a case where the temporarily selected music is an unselected music other than a music which have ever been selected by the player, but causes the speaker to output the selected music from a portion of the beginning of singing in a case where the selected music is an unselected music.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a musical piece selected by a player from a plurality of musical pieces may be output as an effect during a jackpot game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-49375, A

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the interest degree of the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest in the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Display the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output from the audio output means (26),
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the player may have already selected the temporarily selected music as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected song other than the selected song, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected song from the chorus part,
When the selected music is the unselected music, the audio output means (26) is caused to output the unselected music from the music start portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest in the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

The perspective view showing an example of composition of a game machine. The development view showing an example of composition of a game machine. The development view showing an example of composition of a game machine. The front view which shows an example of the game board of a game machine. A block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of a game machine. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the starting winning process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process performed with a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game time control process performed with a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed with a game machine. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination processing performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed with a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game production process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the other example of the temporary music selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the music selection counter data table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the already-selected music list table and non-selected music list table used by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement|positioning order data table with respect to several music used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement|sequence of a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the initial music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows the other example of the initial arrangement of a music selection image. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the initial provisional selection music determination process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the temporary selection music lottery table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the initial provisional selection music output process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selected music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 5R certainty variation|selection music selection button effect determination process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection button effect table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certainty change selection button effect lottery table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table determination table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing performed with the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table used with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table determination table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting process performed with a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game start standby process performed with a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting history selection process performed with a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect history screen process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selected music output process performed with a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the temporary selection music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the selected music output process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process performed with a game machine.

Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. In addition, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 74.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is used as an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other examples such as a spinning-body gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, or a Jiyan ball gaming machine are also described. The present invention can be applied to the above-mentioned gaming machines.

The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

[Structure of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes operation buttons 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination unit 27. ..

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the pressing operation is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is used to reflect the intention of the player in the jackpot game effect in the game time effect process (step S1709 of FIG. 15) described later.

The operation button 20 is not limited to being installed in front of the upper plate 23 but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the operation button 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like as long as it can be used for detecting the presence or absence of the operation by the player.

Further, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation of the touch key by the player is provided as the operation means instead of the operation button 20. Further, it is conceivable that, instead of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 are provided as an operation unit. The operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the effect in the game time effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) described later.

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is pressed by the player in the music selection process (step S2220 of FIG. 23) described later and the game setting process (step S1711 of FIG. 15) described later. It is a push button that accepts. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in the music selection process and the game setting process in order to provisionally select a desired item from the options (items) displayed in the later-described symbol display portion 341, An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is provided with operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the temporarily selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes an operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the decision button 21B.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the enter button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives the operation of the touch key by the player is provided as the operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B, it is conceivable that a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 are provided as the operation means. It is also possible to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214).

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a game ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and stores the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball firing mechanism 32 in an aligned state. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and has a game time effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and a jackpot game effect process (FIG. 23)) and the like to execute a sound effect for outputting a sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect by a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking. The speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the presentation means of the present invention.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. It should be noted that in FIG. 2, the illustration on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, various commands (control signals) for instructing control contents are transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the game board 31, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first working opening 314, a second working opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an out opening 318. A variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display unit 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. To be done.

Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is drive-controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first working opening 314, the second working opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back surface side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of the game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when it is hitting to the right.

The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of a game ball entering by the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as a winning. Note that the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the entrance of a game ball by another detection method.

In addition, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second operating port 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b, and enter the game ball into the second operating port 315 by closing the electric accessory 315b. The ball is limited.

Further, the variable winning a prize opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the variable winning a prize opening 316. The opening/closing door 316b is opened/closed by a driving unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game balls into the variable winning opening 316 by opening the opening/closing door 316b, and the entrance of the game balls into the variable winning opening 316 is restricted by closing the opening/closing door 316b. It

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 determines whether or not to win the jackpot. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "big hit lottery"). Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result. Further, the jackpot lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the incoming ball sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316. The number of prize balls in the case of doing is 15. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the special game state is entered, and the variable winning port 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) for a predetermined number of times ( By repeating this process 5 times, 16 times, for example, a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and the player is given a gaming value.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the result of the winning/non-winning determination is winning, the predetermined jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is shifted to. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) and 16R jackpot variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state includes an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning port 316. It is in a state. The 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is played 16 times, and it can be expected to pay out a larger amount of prize balls than the 5R jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot gaming state. It is a game state.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, such as symbol variation display and game time effect display according to the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the upper operation opening 314 or the lower operation opening 315. Various types of display are performed. The symbol display portion 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is possible to provide one or a plurality of sub-displays separately from the symbol display 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, on the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or on the left or right portion. The sub display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub-display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. In addition, between the main symbols, other characters or sub-designs such as designs may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and the types of main symbols are nine types of "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, at each game time, after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped. It More specifically, in the symbol variation display, all of the main symbols fluctuate along the preset variation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the result of the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot" or "5R regular jackpot", the state in which the main symbols of the same symbol are displayed on the activated line is a jackpot. Is specified. Further, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the activated line, but it is not always explicitly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination set as the symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, for example, “777” symbol combination is lined up on the activated line. Is displayed, or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” is displayed on the activated line. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which a symbol combination such as "333" set in advance as a symbol combination showing the 5R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the activated line It is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than the symbol combinations showing the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 5R certainty variation jackpot such as “777” and “333” are lined up on the activated line. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a combination of symbols showing a probable jackpot such as "222" or "444" set in advance as a symbol combination showing a regular jackpot among the main symbols. The state where the same combination of symbols other than is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, a state in which a combination of different main symbols is lined up on the activated line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

Further, in the symbol display portion 341, together with the symbol variation display in each game time, a game time effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variation jackpot", when the state where the jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols showing the 16R probability variation jackpot are lined up on the activated line is displayed, 5R as a game time effect A suggestion effect that suggests the probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game times effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", when a state where jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the activated line is displayed, 5R as a game time effect A suggestive production that suggests that the jackpot is usually a big hit is executed. In this case, in the game times effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the symbol display portion 341 displays a big hit game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. In the present embodiment, in the symbol display unit 341, a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the round game of the first round in the open/close execution mode to the end of the round game of the first round in the open/close execution mode) elapses from the execution start of the open/close execution mode effect. Up to, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) that allows selection of music output from the speaker 26 as a jackpot game effect is displayed. Hereinafter, the period in which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as the music selection valid period. On the other hand, when the game times effect and the jackpot game effect are not displayed (in the non-gaming state), the game setting image can be displayed by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, and the selection can be made based on the game setting image. By operating the determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and a determination button 21B), it is possible to perform game settings. Details of the music selection process (step S2220 of FIG. 23) in the big hit game effect (big hit game state) and the game setting process (step S1711 of FIG. 15) in the non-gaming state will be described later.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the actuation unit 310. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the actuation unit 310 using the magnet is performed, the illegal act can be detected.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act when an electric wave is illegally input to the detection sensor 314a or the detection sensor 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example. Further, the radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

The main display part 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331, triggered by the winning of the through gate 317 as a lighting pattern. On the 7-segment display 372, variable display of symbols is performed with a winning of the first operation opening 314 as a trigger, and symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the variable display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operation port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N and the number M of variable displays, which are generated by winning the prize in the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, are displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
The back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140, as shown in FIG. 3.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls of the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of payouts of game balls by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to various control devices and various driving means provided in the gaming machine 10. To do.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 is an example of a main control unit that includes the main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a ROM 411 and a RAM 412 built therein. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display section 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball entering the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. In addition, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is an illegal act using a magnet or a radio wave based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command to the voice lamp control device 5. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in the pending storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. It is determined based on the information that is output and is output to the voice lamp control device 5. The hold number command is used to notify the hold number N or the hold number M after the increase when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in a hold storage area 412b described later increases. Is output to. The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp controller 5 when the hold number N or the hold number M currently stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, and the shift command outputs the hold number. When N or the number of holdings M decreases, it is output to the voice lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holdings N or the number of holdings M after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the jackpot game state is entered. The jackpot end command is output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the jackpot gaming state ends. Other various commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as a means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes the main timer interrupt (to be described later) every time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the embedded process is activated and executed. The oscillating circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply operation clocks of various control main bodies in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, an electrical configuration for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the various counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the electric-role holding area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining the outlying type. Be done. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining a variation display time in the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341. Be done. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 used in the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is brought into the electric power open state, and the initial value setting of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, in the case of collectively explaining the plurality of types of counters, they are simply referred to as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at a short time interval and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA, and the type of game times that the 7-segment display 372 displays in a variable and stopped manner may be referred to as a first special figure game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of game times that the 7-segment display 373 displays in a variable and stopped manner may be referred to as a second special figure game. is there.

When a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the hit/miss information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operating port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is stored. It is acquired as the hit/fail information used in the hit/no hit determination, and is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The win/loss information acquisition process is performed by the MPU 41 that functions as a win/loss information acquisition processing unit by performing a process according to the control program. Note that lottery counters 412a (such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1) are individually associated with the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 has the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, the jackpot in the game times executed based on the winning/disabling information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB In addition to the hit/no-judgment determination, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the winning/discarding information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holding N.

Further, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit/miss information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4, the first operating port 314. And, it is possible to hold up to a maximum of four pieces of the winning/losing information as the winning history of the game balls to the second operating port 315.

It should be noted that it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and in this case as well, up to a total of eight holding areas are provided. It is possible to hold the win/loss information as a winning history. The storage process of the hit/miss information is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as a hold processing unit by executing a process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move each value of the hit/miss information stored in. Specifically, each value of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and each value does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the number of reserved storage areas NAB is 0, each value of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA and the number N of holdings stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB of the second holding storage area REB is 2 or more. In this case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. Further, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the respective values of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on various numerical value information stored as the win/fail information in the execution area AE at the start of one game time. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/fail information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, The hit/fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/fail information stored in the second holding area REB2 shifts to the first holding area REB1 and the third holding area REB1. The hit/fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

The value of the random number to be a big hit is determined by the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in the ROM 411, that is, the low probability mode (first gaming state) that is the normal gaming state and the high probability mode (the second gaming state) that is the probability variation gaming state. Two types are set according to the (state). Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of the low probability mode hit/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the high probability mode hit/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the number of random numbers that is a big hit in the low probability mode is 2 (373, 727), and the number of random numbers that is a big hit in the high probability mode is large. The number is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table, two random numbers (373, 727) that are jackpot wins are common, but it is also possible that they are not common. In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery is out.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7C, if the type of game times is the first special figure game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of game times is the second special figure game, the number of random numbers that are 5R certainty jackpots is 0 to 5, and the number of random numbers that is 16R certainty jackpots is 10 from 5 to 14 Yes, the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 15 to 19. That is, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability variation machine in which the probability of the probability variation jackpot is the same in the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special figure game is set to be higher than that in the first special game. That is, in the probability variation short game state, compared to the normal game state such as the normal time saving game state and the normal non-time saving game state, the expectation value of the game ball is high when the result of the win/loss determination in the jackpot lottery is a win. It is set.

In the present embodiment, each of the first operating ports 314 that triggers the execution of the first special game by winning the game ball, and the second operating ports 315 that triggers the execution of the second special game by winning the game ball. The individual distribution table is set in, the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 the game ball wins, but the first special figure game It is also conceivable that the jackpot type distribution probabilities are the same as in the second special figure game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability variation machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two-mixer, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R certainty variation jackpot", "16R certainty variation jackpot", "5R regular jackpot". , Or “out” is determined.

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R certainty variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, the open/close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

In the case of 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, it shifts to the probability variation short-time mode which is the high probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is high and the high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric auditors 315b is high after the jackpot game is over. Then, the probability variation short-time mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, it is executed in the normal time saving mode, which is a low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low after the jackpot game is over, and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode is continued until the lottery of the jackpots set in advance, for example, 50 times or 100 times, is completed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of the loop probability variation machine, after the jackpot game at the probability variation jackpot is over, the number of jackpots set in advance (for example, 50 times or 100 times) The lottery is executed in the probability variation short-time mode (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), then shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode ends. It is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation short-time mode to the normal time-shortening mode or the low probability mode at each game time. In addition, when the jackpot lottery result is missed, the jackpot gaming state and the high frequency support mode are not shifted. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two-round certainty variation jackpot 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as round jackpot, 16R jackpot.

In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the big hit lottery is out of alignment. Specifically, by the detachment type table stored in the detachment type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front-rear outreach, in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach also occurs After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of out-of-bounds, that is, the out-of-front/out-of-place reach and the out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and the reach does not occur is set. Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the disconnection type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7D, the value of the random number that is the out-of-position reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is the reach other than the out-of-position is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of reach is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that the reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the 5R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the game times where the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, the reach is a variable state in which a state in which the jackpot is likely to be won is shown between the start of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a changed state. Also, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is also possible that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be reduced in size during execution of these effect processes.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electricity reserve area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, the winning is won, and if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is considered to be a win.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 determines a rough fluctuation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the MPU 41 executes a main process described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table set in advance. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In addition, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIG. 7(E), FIG. 7(F), and FIG. 7(G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 7(E), FIG. 7(F), and FIG. 7(G), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table, the variation pattern according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated in advance. Then, the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "5R regular big jackpot", the regular jackpot variation table, when the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot" or "16R certainty variation jackpot", the certainty variation jackpot variation table, the lottery result is "miss" , The deviation variation table is referred to and the variation pattern type is specified.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7(E) and 7(F), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the variable display is executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 seconds. In addition, when the variation pattern “02” is selected, the variable display is executed in the pattern display portion 341 in the super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 seconds. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the variable display in the special reach mode in which the variable display time is 90 s, which is the longest. The types of variation patterns are not limited to these. In addition, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and one of the normal reach selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super-reach with different characters and stories are prepared as the super-reach corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, and one of the super-reach selected from among them is executed. It Super reach is a reach that has a longer fluctuation time than normal reach and a shorter fluctuation time than special reach, and it has a higher probability of being a big hit than normal reach, and a lower probability of being a big hit than special reach. It is executed when instructing others.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and one of the special reach selected is executed. It The special reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and is a reach including an effect that develops from the normal reach or the super reach.

In addition, in the reach corresponding to various variation patterns, a single-shot operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. , And a player participation type operation effect process such as a long-press operation effect in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7(G), in the deviation variation table, the fluctuation type is determined for each stop type at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front/rear deviation, reach other than front/rear, and complete deviation). Correspondence between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is the front/rear outreach or the reach other than the front/rear outreach, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is complete disassociation, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, when the variation pattern “04” is selected, the variation display time is 7 s and variation display without reach is executed on the symbol display unit 341. Further, when the variation pattern “05” is selected, the variation display time is 10 s and variation display without reach is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern “04” is displayed as a variation display at the time of the detachment, and the variation display is stopped without a notice effect such as a character and a message being displayed. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern “05” at the time of disconnection is a variable display of the disconnection pattern in which the variable display is disengaged with a notice effect such as a character and a message being displayed, and the discontinuity pattern is stopped. To be executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05” is performed, a player participation type notice display in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result is output to the voice lamp control device. Enter in 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds a variable pattern command “A” indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is in front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of "A01" to "A03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is the 5R certainty variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "B03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, the MPU 41 adds a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is the 16R probability variation jackpot before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "C03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “miss”, the MPU 41 changes pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the change is before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Will be output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can judge the lottery result and the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the lottery result and the variation pattern. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination section 27. Let

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and various variation tables for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a variable display of symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and It is an example of a sub-control unit that executes effect display.

[Voice lamp controller 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices or lamp lighting patterns used in various effects. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4, the display control device 6 A command (control signal) is input to and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination portion 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display portion 341. For example, when the MPU 51 executes the game time effect (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and the jackpot game effect (step S1710 in FIG. 15), the display of the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit. The lighting mode of 27 is controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 executes the output of the music from the speaker 26 and the display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game effect.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are input from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Further, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

In addition, the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the lighting mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like, based on various commands input from the main control device 4. Is. Further, the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the lighting mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like, based on the operation of the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B. It is also possible.

The MPU 51 performs a predetermined operation based on various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command, which are input from the main controller 4. Perform arithmetic processing.

Specifically, the MPU 51, when the variation pattern command is input, the variation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 20(B)), and effect based on the variation pattern command. The type (see FIGS. 21A to 21C) is determined (see steps S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 19), the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the symbol display unit The variable display of symbols in 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display portion 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command indicates the 5R normal jackpot, the combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R regular jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot. Is displayed, and when showing 16R certainty variation jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R regular jackpot and 5R certainty variation jackpot or 16R certainty variation jackpot is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. The voice lamp controller 5 and the display controller 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. The display control device 6 also includes various circuits such as a timer circuit that measures time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In the ROM 611, in addition to various control programs, a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, an out effect image, and a jackpot game effect are used. A plurality of types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening/closing effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25), a top menu image used for game setting, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. There is. Each image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image or a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image used and the display timing of each image, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display various images in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, whereby the symbol variable display and the effect display are realized.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various processes executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built therein.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for various types of processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopping member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out, It is provided with a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as the ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, whereby the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are provided. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to the card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built therein. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The firing control device 8 includes a firing control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321. Let it feed on. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 with a clock signal that is switched ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the launch control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22, the greater the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22, the more the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for allowing the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When it is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game is prevented when the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by rotating the firing handle 22 and operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, +5V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for charging with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, various control devices can be driven for a predetermined period by the electric power discharged from the secondary battery even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off.

Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment, it is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. To judge. When the main controller 4, the voice lamp controller 5, the payout controller 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power controller 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, various kinds of processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is regularly started up, and a power failure. NMI interrupt processing etc. are executed. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process is omitted.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
FIG. 8 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process of determining the detection states of various sensors or switches connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when a game ball is detected to enter any of the ball sensors 313a to 317a.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and those counter values have reached the maximum value. In that case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process, which will be described later, in association with winning in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005).

In the launch control process, it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated, so that the game ball This is the process of enabling firing. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. Is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a lottery based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c to determine whether or not to set the electric auditor product 315b of the second operating port 315 to the electric power open state. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. When the high frequency support mode is not set, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 and the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 250 when the normal winning number is lost. It is determined that Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 250, and is out of the range. It is determined that When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through-gate process, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the game ball to the second operation port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Starting winning process of main controller 4]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, when the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number N of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number N of reservations (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 11) that is updated in the main processing described later. And S1309) are stored in the first free holding area among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the win/loss information before the win/loss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target of the jackpot win/loss in the variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 12) described later. Then, the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second operating port 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then, (step S1106: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-reservations storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning processing and shifts the processing to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number M of reservations (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 sets the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later. The first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412 are stored in the first empty reserved area.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the win/loss information before the win/non-play information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes the determination target of the jackpot win/loss in the variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 12) described later. Then, the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command is executed based on this confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 10, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, if “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “holding number N” is replaced with “holding number M” in the first holding command setting process of FIG. Good.

[First hold command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the hold number N. ..

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of reservations N from the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether it is in the high-probability mode. If it is in the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if it is not in the high-probability mode (step S1202). : No), and the procedural steps proceed to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high-probability mode based on the high-probability mode flag that can be set to ON in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when shifting to the high-probability mode, and is set to OFF when shifting to the low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to the jackpot win based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 7B). Execute the judgment of success or failure. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to the jackpot win, based on the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 7A). Whether or not it is executed is executed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and from the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the read value does not correspond to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit/miss information is stored in the third holding storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 9, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the hit/hold information stored in the third holding storage area RE3. The value of is read. It should be noted that, among the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the hit/miss information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 9 is determined by the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the number N of holdings to the first holding command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp controller 5 that receives the first hold command causes the hold command included in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the hit/no hit information. ..

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number N of suspensions in the first suspension command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412 and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 in step S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 11) described later. At the same time, it is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, the main control processing of the game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1306 is executed as regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, for example, and the counter updating processing of steps S1307 to S1309 is executed in the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140 in an external output process. To execute. For example, when various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub control unit 332 Send the command to. Further, in step S1001 of FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413, and if the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 413, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313 or the like. Then, if a prize has been generated, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the prize is set.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time. Although the game times control process will be described later, in the game times control process, the above-mentioned big hit lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Based on each value of, the variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and the variation display time of the jackpot lottery is set.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 14). In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state including an open/close execution mode, a probability variation short game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency. It shifts to a normal short time game state which is a support mode, a normal non-short time game state which is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the game times for the jackpot are completed, and executes the jackpot game including the open/close execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag, 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or 5R normal jackpot flag which is set to ON in step S1607, S1608 or S1609 of FIG. 14 to be described later is on at the end of the game times for the jackpot, After the game time for the jackpot is finished, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 opens the opening/closing door 316b of the variable winning a prize port 316, and then, when the maximum opening time of the opening/closing door 316b of the variable winning a prize port 316 has passed, or the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened. When there is a predetermined upper limit number of winnings, one round of opening/closing processing for closing the opening/closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly executed 5 or 16 times depending on the type of jackpot.

Further, the MPU41, after the jackpot game is executed, when the jackpot type is the 5R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the gaming state is changed from the jackpot gaming state to the certainty variation short time gaming state, and the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot. In this case, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the normal short playing state.

Further, when the MPU 41 shifts the game state transition, the MPU 41 sets a flag corresponding to the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation short time gaming state, and sets the high speed mode flag to ON when shifting the gaming state to the normal time short gaming state. To do. Further, when the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets the time saving counter (50 times or 100 times) set in advance as the number of game times to be executed in the time saving mode.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, in the 7-segment display 372, 373 in the main display unit 37, the symbol variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is the main symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be stopped by the combination of. Further, by the display control process, the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, the symbol variation display is executed only during a predetermined ordinary symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the presence or absence of the regular symbol winning. Will stop. In the case of the normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main processing this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived (step S1307: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1301 and executes the above-described processing of S1301 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not come (step S1307: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main processing comes, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. During the remaining time, the steps S1307, S1308, and S1309 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes).

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1 and then returns the processing to step S1307.

[Game time control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a game number control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 11 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the big hit game, and when the big hit game is in progress (step S1401: Yes), ends the game times control process and is not in the big hit game. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not to execute the big hit game is determined based on the big hit game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the big hit game and is set to OFF at the end of the big hit game. Further, when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game start command, and transmits this big hit game start command to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command, and transmits this jackpot game end command to the voice lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1614 (see FIG. 14) of the variation start processing described later, and is turned off in step S1405 when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). It is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variable display, and when determining that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), moves the process to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the game number control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of main symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the game times on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37. It is displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405). When the process of step S1405 is finished, the MPU 41 finishes the game number control process.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether both the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of reservations storage area 412b and the number M of reservations stored in the number storage area NAB of reservations are 0. To do. Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game number control process. On the other hand, when one of the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations is not 0, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes the data setting process for the data of the hit/miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the game time control process. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special figure game is 0, and when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the winning/disapproval information from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REA2 to the fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the hit/fail information of the second holding area REA2 is moved to the first holding area REA1, the hit/fail information of the third holding area REA3 is moved to the second holding area REA2, and the fourth holding area REA4 is set. The hit/miss information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Although step S1505 shifts when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), step S1501 shifts when both or one of the number M of reservations and the number N of reservations is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. Yes (step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number N of reservations is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit/miss information from the first holding area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REB2 to the fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit/fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the hit/fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4 is moved. The hit/miss information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether the time saving mode flag that can be set to ON in the game state transition processing (step S1305 in the main processing of FIG. 11) is set to ON, and the time saving mode flag is set to ON. If so (step S1508: Yes), the counter value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time saving mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 ends the data setting process.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving mode flag to off (step S1511), and when the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), The data setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high-probability mode flag that can be set to on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to on (step S1601), and the high-probability mode flag is on. Is set (step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is not set to ON (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the big hit based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 7B). Whether or not the value is a value is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE is a big hit based on the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 7A). Whether or not the value is the corresponding value is determined.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. Then, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit (step S1604: Yes), the big hit type is judged (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is the 5R certainty jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hit/miss information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7C). Or not (step S1605), it is determined whether or not it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S1606).

When the jackpot type is the 5R certainty variation jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag to on (step S1607). The 5R certainty variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit/miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R certainty variation jackpot. In addition, in step S1607, the stop result of the main display portion 37 at the game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is also set based on the winning or hitting information. The 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the fluctuation start process. When the process of step S1607 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit/miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, in step S1608, the stop result of the main display portion 37 in the game times in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R certainty variation jackpot is also set based on the winning or hitting information. The 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. When the process of step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R regular jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit/miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R normal jackpot. In addition, in step S1609, the stop result of the main display portion 37 at the game time where the result of the big hit lottery is the 5R normal big hit is also set based on the winning or hitting information. The 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the fluctuation start process. When the process of step S1609 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the disengagement flag to on (step S1610). The removal flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit/miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is out. In addition, in step S1610, the stop result of the main display portion 37 at the game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is out is also set based on the winning or hitting information. The disengagement flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start process. When the process of step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the game time in the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 7E). Further, when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the certainty variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 7F). Further, when the detachment flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the outlying variation table (see FIG. 7G).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the game game and the variation pattern identified in step S1611 and stores the variation pattern command in the RAM 512. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 11) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot to the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” to “A01” to “O”. Either "A03" is set as the variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is one of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R certainty variation jackpots. Or is set as a variation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” indicates the 16R probability variation jackpot. Or is set as a variation pattern. When the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of change pattern “01” to “08”. Set as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information indicating whether it is a front/rear outreach, a reach other than front/rear outreach, or a complete outreach.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variable display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variable display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here is stopped in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610 after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 74.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27, startup processing at startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at power failure, etc. Description of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), selection button operation detection processing (step S1703), and selection operation detection in the sub-timer interrupt processing. Pattern determination processing (step S1704), determination button operation detection processing (step S1705), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1706), counter update processing (step S1707), command determination processing (step S1708), game number effect processing ( The step S1709), the jackpot game effect process (step S1710), and the game setting process (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of will be determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 is the operation state of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals as the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern determination process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the pattern flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. If only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1902, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the second operation pattern is set. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), it determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. It is determined (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1907, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the first operation pattern to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the first operation pattern is set. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18A). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected, so that the radio wave Alternatively, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity, and to prevent the operation display of the operation end of the operation button 20 at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 18A). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes the up selection button operation process, the down selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the lower selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Right select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 performs the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Execute.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects an upper portion from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In addition, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is “upper selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 51, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 that is determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is the “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “lower selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 51, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the down selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third down selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 that is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is the “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “left selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the left selection button 213. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times, The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times. The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 51, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is the “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “right selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the right selection button 214. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 for three times, The 1st right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, The 1st right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 51, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the enter button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the enter button 21B, and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the determination button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be read as the “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16.

[Decision operation detection pattern determination processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag for determining is set. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 generates operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). ..

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). ..

Further, when the operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the decision button 21B for three times, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third decided operation pattern flags. Set to off. The MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 15, in the counter update processing (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the variable display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by 1. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable is being changed, and that the variable display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended. In the present embodiment, for example, the fluctuation display counter determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53(A)) in which the fluctuation display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is stopped in step S3401 of FIG. 52. In this case, in step S3501 of FIG. 57, step S3601 of FIG. 58, etc., it is referred to when it is determined whether or not the variable display of the main symbol is started in the symbol display portion 341.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 in FIG. 15). In the command determination process, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2001: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command is received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2001 and becomes the processing target. Remembered.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2003 when the command is the fluctuation pattern command (step S2002: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2006 when the command is not the fluctuation pattern command (step S2002: No).

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols, variation type and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51, a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 20(B)), and an effect type table ( The variation pattern is determined based on FIGS. 21A to 21C) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, MPU51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to ON, when the variation pattern command includes information about the jackpot type. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type. Is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally and stop displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 21A), a super reach production table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 21B), and a special reach production table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 21B). FIG. 21C) is included.

Here, FIG. 20(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 20(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is defined. 20A, the main symbols are "1" to "9", and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), which is a symbol combination, "777". "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the other than "333" and "777" is a 5R regular jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 16R certainty variation jackpot. I assume.

The lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R regular big hit”, the symbol combination of “333” or “777” indicating that it is the 5R certainty big jackpot or the 16R certainty big jackpot (the certainty big jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the symbol combinations of the doublet other than the symbol combination “333” indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333", which indicates that the main symbol is stopped and displayed, indicates that the main symbol is stopped and displayed. And when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", when the main symbols other than "3" except "7" are determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to ON. .. The first promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 5R certainty variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 5R certainty variation jackpot is performed in a state where the 5R regular jackpot is suggested (the jackpot in FIG. 22). (Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial temporary selected music output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporary selected music output process in FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selected music output process in FIG. 41, etc.).

Furthermore, the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9" The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the stop display of the main symbol indicates that the symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is the stop display. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", if "3" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to "3" as the first stop symbol. When a main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is the 16R probability variation jackpot while suggesting that it is the 5R probability variation jackpot (the jackpot game of FIG. 22. (Step S2106 in the effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial temporary selected music output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporary selected music output process in FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selected music output process in FIG. 41, etc.). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 16R certainty variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is the 16R certainty variation jackpot in a state in which the 5R normal jackpot is suggested (the jackpot in FIG. 22). (Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial provisional selection music output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the provisional selection music output process in FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selection music output process in FIG. 41, etc.).

Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, and determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol determined earlier. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 at the game time is determined.

On the other hand, the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" ~ "9", the first stop symbol determination with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" ~ "9" To be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “out”, the out type selected based on the out type table (FIG. 7(D)) and the first stop previously determined The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the disengagement type is front-rear reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the release type is a reach other than the front/back detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. Further, when the disengagement type is completely disengaged, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol in the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 20B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the fluctuation type table, the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach” are associated with the variation pattern command “A01” whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern is “01”. In addition, the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach” are associated with the variation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “02”. The fluctuation display time “90 s” and the fluctuation type “special reach” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “C03” whose result is “16 probability variable jackpot” and whose fluctuation pattern is “03”. Further, the variation pattern time “7s” and the variation type “no reach” are associated with the variation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the variation pattern is “04”, and the lottery result is The fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “no reach” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “D05” that is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “05”.

Furthermore, FIG. 21(A) to FIG. 21(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect type table. The effect type table is defined for each variation type. 21A is a normal reach effect table when the change type is normal reach, FIG. 21B is a super reach effect table when the change type is super reach, and FIG. It is a special reach production table when the variation type is special reach. In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where there are five effect types corresponding to each variation type, but the effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 21, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 21(A), depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation), "effect X1" as an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter. “Demonstration X5” is defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, it selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 21B, "effect Y1" to "effect Y5" are defined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 21C, "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are defined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Then, the MPU 51 sets a stop pattern combination of main symbols determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, and the display fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation type and the effect type, and the RAM 512. Remember. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command may include information on whether or not a big hit is won.

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process (step S1707) of FIG. 15, and the MPU 51 determines, based on the variable display counter, whether or not the symbol variable is being displayed, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc. It is possible to judge. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type and the effect type to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2003, the variation type and the effect type. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, The fluctuations of the main symbols are displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol variation display or the jackpot game of the next game time is executed. Here, during the variable display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the change type and the effect type specified by the display change pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that the big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2006: No), the process To Step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The big hit game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to execute the opening effect start process in the big hit game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command indicating that the big hit game is ended, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to OFF at the end of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2010, and if the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2009: No), the process To Step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON, for example, in step S2013 to be described later, and is referred to in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 to be described later when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect. (Step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a hold command. The hold command includes the first hold command and the second hold command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or the deviation, the variation pattern, and the number N of variable displays held due to the winning of the first operation opening 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or the deviation, the variation pattern, and the number M of suspensions of the variable display generated by winning the second operation port 315. Here, if the received command is a hold command (step S2011: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2012, and if the received command is not a hold command (step S2011: No), the process proceeds to step S2013. Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the deviation specified by the first hold command, the change pattern, the hold number N, etc. in the change type area of the RAM 512. .. Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the deviation, the variation pattern, the number M of holdings, and the like specified by the second hold command in the variation type area of the RAM 512.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process. For example, the MPU 51 sets the open/close execution mode start flag to ON when it receives the open/close execution mode start command, and sets the open/close execution mode end flag to ON when it receives the open/close execution mode end command. The opening/closing execution mode start flag is referred to when determining whether to end the opening effect and start the opening/closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (steps S2206 to S2208). .. On the other hand, the opening/closing execution mode end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the opening/closing execution mode effect and start the ending effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (steps S2212 to S2214). ..

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007 in FIG. 19). In the jackpot game effect determination process, effects to be executed in the jackpot game such as an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening/closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be executed during the period from the shift to the big hit game to the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed (or the first stop symbol) based on, for example, the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 clearly shows that the symbol combination is 16R probability variation jackpot when the symbol combination is "777", and the 5R probability variation jackpot when the symbol combination is "333". If the suggested effect, the symbol combination is a doublet other than “777” and “333”, the effect that suggests that it is a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type, but according to the symbol combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed (or the first stopped symbol).

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be executed after ending the opening/closing execution mode and before the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type, for example, based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

Here, the ending effect is to inform the player that the jackpot game is over after the opening/closing execution mode is over. Further, in the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result in the game times leading to the jackpot game (an indication of the gaming state to be transferred after the jackpot game is finished) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, in the ending production, the lottery result will be a big hit in the normal short time game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal non-time saving game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), so-called If the initial hit is a 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, an image clearly indicating that the probability variation time short game state, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the initial hit is 5R. An image that clearly indicates that the normal non-time saving game state is to be entered in the case of a normal jackpot is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the probability variation time short game state is entered is, for example, "XX RUSH rush". On the other hand, the image clearly indicating that the normal non-time saving game state is to be entered is, for example, "chance zone entry", and the time saving number is also displayed. Further, in the ending effect when the lottery result becomes a big hit in the probability variation short game state, an image clearly indicating that the probability variation short game state is entered again is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The image that clearly indicates that the probability variation time short game state is to be entered again is, for example, "Continuing XX RUSH." In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to the probability variation short time game state for one initial hit (for example, the number of times RUSH continues) and the image of the character that appeared in the big hit effect at the game times that led to the big hit game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341. The image showing the number of times of transition to the probability variation short game state and the image of the character are determined in this step S2102.

Further, in the ending effect, an image related to payouts such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game and the total number of payouts in the condominium is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the ending effect may be one that displays a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that the below-described continuous holiday resort is executed. These images are determined in step S2214 of the jackpot game effect process described later with reference to FIG. 23, for example.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set to ON. If the first promotion effect flag is ON (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, and If the 1st promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: NO), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. During or after the execution of the 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect, the 5R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability jackpot. Is to be executed or not. In the first promotion effect flag, the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", and a symbol combination (a symbol combination other than "333" and "777") that suggests a 5R regular jackpot as the main symbol stop display result is determined. If it is determined that it is ON, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect). For example, the 5R normal big hit opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal big hit opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect type information to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines the 5R probability variation promotion effect. The 5R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 5R probability variation promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined type of the 5R probability variation promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a probability variation promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to on. If the second promotion effect flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and When the 2 promotion effect flag is off (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion effect flag indicates a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot during or after the execution of the 5R probability variation jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect that suggests that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot. It indicates whether or not to execute. In the second promotion effect flag, the lottery result is “16R probability jackpot”, and when the symbol combination suggesting 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the command determination of FIG. It is turned on in step S2003 in the process.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests the 5R certainty variation jackpot as the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode (5R certainty variation jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect). For example, the 5R probability variation big hit opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R probability variation big hit opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined 5R probability variation jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect type information to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines the 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 16R promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the type of the selected 16R promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set to ON. If the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, and the process proceeds to step S2110. When the 3 promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. Whether or not the third promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, which indicates that the lottery result is a 16R certainty jackpot, during or after the 5R regular jackpot suggestion production It indicates whether or not. In the third promotion effect flag, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", and a symbol combination that suggests 5R normal jackpot is determined as the main symbol stop display result, step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. Is set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect), as in step S2104, and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open/close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines the 16R probability variation promotion effect. The 16R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 16R probability variation promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined type of the 16R certainty change promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R certainty change promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag which is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination processing of FIG. 19 is set to ON (when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (step S2112). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2113, and if the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag is off (step S2112: No), the process proceeds to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, similarly to step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R certainty variation jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode (5R certainty variation jackpot opening/closing execution mode attraction), and determines the determined 5R certainty jackpot opening/closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open/close execution mode effect command, and the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to OFF.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag which is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination processing of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (step S2114). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and if the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 16R certainty variation jackpot (an opening/closing execution mode effect for 16R certainty variation jackpot) as an effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the 16R probability variation big hit opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 16R probability variation big hit opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the open/close execution mode effect for 16R certainty variation jackpot to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command, and sets the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag to OFF.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot as an effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect), and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open/close execution mode effect command, and the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF.

[Big hit game production processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process (step S1710 in FIG. 15). In the big hit game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening/closing execution mode effect, etc. determined in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. 22 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag which is set to ON in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is ON ( (Step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening effect start process (step S2202) and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2203). In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 to execute the audio effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 of FIG. A command that causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called suspended game is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The holding condominium is a big hit (5R Probable variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit or 5R normal big hit) It is executed when information indicating that it is included. That is, it means that the jackpot game occurs within the maximum number of holdings M at the end of the jackpot game within the game times. For example, when the number M of holdings at the end of the jackpot game is 4, a case where a jackpot occurs within 4 game times is called a holding condominium. Whether or not the suspension game is executed can be determined, for example, by referring to the variation classification area of the RAM 512 and whether or not the jackpot classification specified by the second suspension command is stored.

However, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the suspension condominium is executed by referring to the variation type area at the stage of starting the opening effect. That is, if the result of the big hit lottery from the start of the big hit game effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode effect is a big hit, it will not be the determination target of the suspension game in step S2204. In addition, with respect to the starting winning of the game ball to the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode effect, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S2214 described later, it is suspended. In the case of executing the hold condominium confirmation effect by determining whether or not the hold condominium confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the condominium operation is performed, in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination processing. In the determined ending effect, the suspended holiday confirmation effect is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the on-hold holiday club flag to ON, and ends the jackpot game effect process. 42, the 5R certainty variable selection song effect lottery table (see FIG. 45) or the 16R certainty variation selection button effect lottery for determining the song selection button effect in step S2904 and step S2906 of the song selection button effect processing of FIG. 42 described later. Referenced when selecting a table (see FIG. 48). To be more specific, the pending holiday flag is set in steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 in the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process of FIG. 43, and steps S3103, S3108, S3114 and in the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process of FIG. 47. Reference is made in S3119. In other words, the below-described suspended holiday confirmation effect executes the retained holiday confirmation effect for the retained holiday resort for which the result of the jackpot lottery before the opening effect is a big hit. Note that the determination in the previous step S2204 is based on steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 of the 5R certainty variation selection button effect determination processing of FIG. You may make it perform in S3119. In this case, since it is determined whether or not the holding condominium is executed at the stage of determining the music selection button effect, the holding condominium in the lottery during the jackpot game is the one until the music selection button effect is started. Since it is a target, the possibility of executing the pending condominium finalizing effect is higher than that in the case of determining whether the pending condominium is executed in the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved for the player who wants to know during the big hit game that the holding holidays will be executed. Moreover, you may perform a pending condominium fixed production|presentation in ending production as above-mentioned. In this case, the hold condominium confirmation effect is set when the player does not execute the hold condominium confirmation effect as the music selection button effect (step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 described later, or the later-described). 73 may be executed as a limited effect (in the case where the holding condominium fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing). Accordingly, even if the player has set non-execution for the suspended holiday confirmation effect, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the suspended holiday resort is executed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open/close execution mode start flag set to on in step S2013 of FIG. 19 is set to on, and if the open/close execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes). ), the process proceeds to step S2207, and if the opening/closing execution mode start flag is off (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the opening/closing execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening effect ending process (step S2207) and executes the opening/closing execution mode effect starting process (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the opening/closing execution mode effect determined in step S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115, or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes a music selection image display process that displays a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) for allowing the player to select the music output in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs a song (initial temporary selected song) corresponding to the temporarily selected song image 832 (initial temporary selected song image) first displayed as the temporarily selected song image 832 in the song selected image 83. Output processing is executed (step S2210). The provisionally selected music image 832 is selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B from the plurality of songs (20 songs in the present embodiment) that can be output from the speaker 26 by the player's selection in the jackpot state as described above. It is an image showing that it is a possible temporarily selected music. Further, the MPU 51 sets the opening/closing execution mode start flag to OFF (step S2211), and ends the jackpot game effect process. The details of the music selection image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the initial temporary selection music output processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open/close execution mode end flag set to on in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on, and if the open/close execution mode end flag is on ( (Step S2212: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2213, and if the open/close execution mode end flag is off (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the opening/closing execution mode end flag is on (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes opening/closing execution mode effect end processing (step S2213). In the opening/closing execution mode effect ending process, the MPU 51 ends the execution of the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the output of the music from the speaker 26, for example.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2214), sets the open/close execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect starting process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determining process. In addition, when the MPU 51 causes the image display section 341 to display an image related to the payout, such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game or the total number of payouts in the condominium, as an ending effect, the image related to the payout is displayed before starting the ending effect. decide. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the suspended holiday confirmation effect in the ending effect, before the ending effect starts, the MPU 51 displays the suspended holiday confirmation image on the symbol display unit 341, outputs the retained holiday confirmation sound from the speaker 26, and the like. Determining the effect of confirming the Suspended Rensou.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to be turned on in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on, and the jackpot game effect end flag is turned on ( (Step S2216: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the process proceeds to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes ending effect end processing (step S2217), and sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218), and the jackpot game. The production process ends.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection processing flag which is set to ON in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 24 described later is set to ON, and the music selection processing flag is set to ON. When it is on (step S2219: Yes), music selection processing is executed (step S2220), and when the music selection processing flag is off (step S2219: No), the jackpot game effect processing is ended. The details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

[Music selection image display processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process (step S2209 in FIG. 23). In the music selection image display process, a music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select the music output in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 25). Further, FIG. 25 is an example of the music selection image display screen 82 including the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which a later-described unselected song in the song selection image 83 is provisionally selected. In the following, an example of the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 25, on the music selection image display screen 82, a music selection image 83, a selection determination part image 84, an operation explanation image 85, and a lyrics telop image 86 are displayed. Further, it is not essential to display images other than the music selection image 83 on the music selection image display screen 82, and it is not necessary to display some or all of the images other than the music selection image 83. Other images may be displayed in place of some or all of the other images.

The music selection image 83 is for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the speaker 26 from a plurality of music (20 musics of music A to music T in this embodiment) prepared in advance for output from the speaker 26. Is. A predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of music selection images 83 displayed in the symbol display unit 341, and a part of the plurality of music (20 music in this embodiment). The music selection image 83 for 10 songs) is displayed in the display area 837 preset in the symbol display portion 341. That is, the number of the plurality of songs is larger than the number of the song selection images 83 (the total number of the already-selected song images 831, the temporarily selected song images 832, and the unselected song images 833). Note that in FIG. 25, among the plurality of songs, the songs that are not displayed in the display area 837 are indicated by virtual lines (reference numeral 838 in the figure). Further, regarding the number of the plurality of songs that can be output in the jackpot game, the number of the plurality of songs prepared in advance for outputting from the speaker 26 is larger than the display upper limit number, but the number of the plurality of songs and the pre-specified It may be the same as the number.

The music selection image 83 includes a selected music image 831, a temporarily selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 that are displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, being distinguishable from each other is not limited to the case where the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 themselves are distinguishable. For example, the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed in the same manner, and these images 831, 832, 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 in FIG. 25). It also includes the case where images can be distinguished from each other by adding images.

The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music A, the music J, and the music D corresponds to the already-selected music image 831. The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the temporarily selected music can be selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music H corresponds to the temporarily selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that the music is a music other than the music that has already been selected and has not been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection images 83 for the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C correspond to the unselected music images 833. However, as will be described later, the upper limit number (3 in the present embodiment) is provided for the selected songs, and even if the songs have been already selected by the player, the songs exceeding the upper limit are already selected. It is processed not as a music but as an unselected music.

In the music selection image 83, when the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed. Details of the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and a modification example of the temporarily selected music image 832 by the player's operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. To do.

Note that, in FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, a case is shown in which, as the music selection image 83, the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the non-selected music image 834 are displayed simultaneously, but in the present embodiment, As described below, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 first displayed on the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 26).

These music images 831 to 833 (music selection image 83) are displayed in the display area 837 set on the left side of the symbol display portion 341. The display area 837 is set to, for example, 1/3 or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display section 341, preferably 1/4 or less, and more preferably 1/5 or less. Is set to the area of. The display area 837 may be set in a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and is not necessarily set in the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. It may be the lower side or the like.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is a game machine in which a music selection image is displayed in the entire area or substantially the entire area of the display screen. For example, there is one in which a plurality of rectangular music selection images are displayed in a matrix over the entire or substantially the entire display screen. In such a conventional gaming machine, the opening/closing execution mode effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized while the music selection image is displayed on the display screen, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is selected during the music selection. Can't enjoy

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display area 837 is set to a part of the music selection image display screen 82 (left side in the present embodiment). Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the player can visually recognize the opening/closing mode effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect can be enjoyed even while the music is being selected. it can.

Further, in the display area 837, the already-selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed vertically in this order. Specifically, in the music selection image 83, from the top in the display area 837, up to the third is the already selected music image 831, the fourth is the temporarily selected music image 832, and the remaining six are the unselected music images 833. .. In the music selection image 83 arranged in this way, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. Note that the music selection image 83 is not limited to the display mode in which the plurality of music selection images 83 are vertically arranged in the display area 837, but may be in the display mode in which the music selection images 83 are horizontally, diagonally, or in a matrix.

The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player. The already-selected music image 831 includes the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 832 depending on the color, pattern, and pattern of the outline portion such as a frame, the character portion, the character background portion, and the effect around the outline portion. It is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 833. In addition, the upper limit number is set in advance for the number of already-selected music images 831 in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the selected music image 831 is three. The upper limit number is not limited to 3, and may be 1, but it is preferable to select from a number of 2 or more. However, the upper limit of the number of already selected music images 831 considers the number of images 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection image 83, the ease of selection when selecting the already selected music based on the already selected music image 831, and the like. In that case, it is preferable to select from the range of 2 to 5.

A display order (music order) is given to the selected music image 831. In the present embodiment, the display rank is increased in ascending order of the music selection date and time, and the selected music pieces with higher display ranks are displayed closer to the temporary selected music image 832 in the initial music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the selected music images 831 corresponding to the selected music A, music J, and music D are displayed in the display area 837 at the top to third positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. ing. In other words, the song selection dates and times of song A, song J, and song D of the plurality of songs are new in this order. Further, in the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is displayed. Specifically, the already-selected music image 831 is fixedly displayed at the top to third positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83, and even when the temporary selection image 832 to be described later is changed. The position of the selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the already-selected music piece is provisionally selected, the music-selection image 83 for the temporarily-selected music piece, which will be described later, is displayed not as the already-selected music piece image 831 but as the temporarily-selected music piece image 832. 27(A) to FIG. 27(C)).

The display order for the selected music image 831 may be given based on conditions other than the selection date and time, for example, the selection frequency. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative number of selections, the number of selections in the latest predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and the selection rate in the latest predetermined number of times. Further, in the following, the term “selection frequency” is used in the same meaning.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the example of FIG. 25, a character “good”) is attached to the side of the selected music image 831, which distinguishes it from the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833. Has been facilitated. However, the selected music image 831 may be distinguished from the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the selected music image 831 may be temporarily selected. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 832 or the unselected music image 833, and may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and the display mode is not limited.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the temporarily selected music is made distinguishable from other music, but the image for the temporarily selected music is displayed in the same manner including the music selected in the past. .. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected song image 831 for the selected song is distinguished from the unselected song image 832 for the unselected song, and therefore the song selected image 83 has been selected in the past. It is possible to distinguish a certain selected music piece with a non-selected music piece. As a result, the already-selected music can be easily found, and the operation of selecting the already-selected music becomes easy. Further, when the display position of the already-selected music image 831 is set as a predetermined area and the temporarily-selected music image 832 is displayed adjacently below the already-selected music image 831, the player can display the music selection image 83. In this case, the most recently selected song can be easily found, and the most recently selected song can be selected again by operating the selection determining unit 21. Furthermore, since the display order is given to the already-selected songs, and the songs are displayed in the position closer to the temporarily selected song image 832 in the initial song selection image 83 in the descending order of the display order, the same song is included in the upper-limit already-selected songs. It will not be done. Therefore, if the player repeatedly selects the same song and wants to select a selected song other than the selected song, the player can easily find the selected song that he wants to select. As a result, the player is less burdened with the operation when re-selecting the previously selected song.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a plurality of pieces of music for one jackpot game during a predetermined music selection valid period (for example, a period during which the opening/closing execution mode of the first R is executed). However, when the music is selected a plurality of times in one jackpot game, only the last selected music selected last is the selected music (step S2813 of the selected music output process of FIG. 41). .. When the number of already-selected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of already-selected songs is 1 or 2, as many already-selected song images 831 are displayed according to the number of already-selected songs. On the other hand, when the number of already-selected songs is 0, or when the player has set not to display the already-selected song image 831 as described later (step S4013 of the song list display setting process of FIG. 63, or If the already-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen process in FIG. 71), the already-selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, the unselected music images 833 other than the non-selected music images 834 are displayed for the number of the selected music that is less than the upper limit. Thereby, even when the number of selected music images 831 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, by displaying the unselected music images 833 instead of the selected music images 831, The specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the temporarily selected music can be selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B. In the example of FIG. 25, the music H is a temporarily selected music, and the temporarily selected music image 832 can be distinguished from the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. A side of the temporarily selected music image 832 is provided with a predetermined mark (in this embodiment, an indicator image 835 of characters “temporary”), and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing the temporarily selected music image 832. It is surrounded by.

Note that the provisionally selected music image 832 only needs to be able to distinguish the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the provisionally selected music image 832 may be already selected. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 831 or the unselected music image 833, and only the predetermined mark may be displayed, and the display mode is not limited.

In addition, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed according to the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21. In the present embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is displayed, a predetermined area, that is, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed at the top to third positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the change mode of the temporarily selected music image 832 is different between the case of temporarily selecting the already selected music and the case of temporarily selecting the unselected music. Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an initial display example of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. 27A to 27C are diagrams showing a modification example of the temporarily selected music image 832 in the already selected music. is there. 26 and 27A to 27C, only the display area 837 of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display portion 341 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 26, when a music piece is temporarily selected from the unselected music pieces, the down selection button 212 is operated. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain unchanged, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music is looped and changed in the order of music P→music T→music S→...→music F→music E→music P. .. Further, when the desired unselected music is provisionally selected, the unselected music can be output from the speaker 26 as the selected music by operating the decision button 21B.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the music selection image 83 first displayed in the symbol display portion 341, in the music loop when temporarily selecting a music from the unselected music, the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) Is arranged at a position farthest from the initial temporarily selected music image 832 (initial temporarily selected music).

On the other hand, when temporarily selecting a music piece from the already selected music pieces, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, first, by operating the up selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 26, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music P as shown in FIG. The music selection image 83 for the music A displayed one above the music P is moved to. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music P is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the unselected music image 833, while the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. To be done. Further, by operating the enter button 21B, it becomes possible to select the temporarily selected music A (already selected music).

In addition, by operating the up selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the song selection image 83 for the song A to the song J as shown in FIG. 27B. To the music selection image 83 for. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. To be done. Further, by operating the enter button 21B, it becomes possible to select the temporarily selected music J (selected music).

Similarly, when the upper operation button 211 is operated once in the state shown in FIG. 27B, the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music as shown in FIG. 27C. While being changed to the image 831, the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the provisionally selected music image 832. Accordingly, by operating the enter button 21B, it becomes possible to select the temporarily selected music D (selected music). Even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 27C, the temporarily selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state in which the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27(B) or FIG. 27(C), the indicator image 835 and the indicator image 835 shown in FIG. 27(A) or 27(B) are displayed. The cursor image 836 is moved to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the next lower music and the temporarily selected music is changed, and the temporarily selected music A or music J is selected by operating the decision button 21B. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P which is one unselected music. As the music moves, the temporarily selected music is changed. Thus, as described with reference to FIG. 26, the lower selection button 212 is operated to temporarily select a song from the unselected songs, and the decision button 21B is operated to select the unselected song. It can be output from the speaker 26.

By the way, conventionally, some gaming machines, such as the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, can select a song to be output during a jackpot game from a plurality of songs. The number of selectable songs in the jackpot game varies depending on the model, but there are some songs from which more than 20 songs can be selected for output during the special game. When the number of selectable songs is large, the range of selecting songs becomes large, so that not only can various songs be enjoyed, but there is also a high possibility that songs that match the tastes of the player are included. Therefore, with a gaming machine that allows you to select songs during a jackpot game, you can let the player listen to various songs and let the player find a favorite song to improve the attention of the jackpot game and the interest of special games. It is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the temporarily selected song is displayed separately from the images for the other songs, but the selected song that was selected in the past or the temporarily selected song image 832 in the song selected image 83 is first displayed. However, the images for the non-selected music pieces that have not been selected by the player despite being displayed in the above are displayed without distinction from each other. As a result, it becomes difficult to find the target song when you want to repeatedly select the player's favorite song or want to listen to the previously selected song again. Even if you can find the target song, you can find the target song. You have to perform troublesome operations. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. Further, there is also a gaming machine in which a period during which a song output during a jackpot game can be selected (a song selection valid period) is set. For example, there is a gaming machine in which the music selection effective period is limited to the end of the first round of the opening effect or the round game (opening/closing execution mode) in the jackpot game. In such a gaming machine, it is even more difficult to find the target music because the target music has to be searched for within a limited period that is not so long. Further, if the selection of the target music in the jackpot game is bothersome and difficult, the player may not select the song in the jackpot game. With this, by preparing multiple songs, letting the player select a song and listening to various songs, and by letting the player find a favorite song, the attention and interest in the jackpot game can be improved. The purpose of improving the willingness to play is buried.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select the music, it is already selected which indicates that the music has already been selected by the player. The music image 831 is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833. In this way, since the selected music image 831 can be distinguished from the unselected music image 833, the player selects from the music selection images 83 when selecting the selected music that has been selected before. It is possible to tentatively select and select a selected music piece based on the selected music image 831. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection determination unit 21 while confirming the position of the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83, thereby selecting the already selected music. It can be temporarily selected and displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832. In this state, by operating the enter button 21B, the already selected music can be output again from the speaker 26 as the selected music. Therefore, if the player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or wants to listen to a previously selected song again, the player can easily find the selected song even if the number of selectable songs is large. You can Not only that, it is possible to efficiently select a previously selected song and output the already selected song from the speaker 26 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 in the music selection image 83, and the already selected image is displayed in the temporarily selected music image 832. Both 831 and the unselected image 833 are displayed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the player changes the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 832 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before and the previously selected music. Even when selecting any of the unselected music that has never been performed, the target music can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the gaming machine 10 supports various types of players, such as a player who tends to repeatedly select already-selected music, and a player who tends to select unselected music. The target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

Returning to FIG. 25, the unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that it is a music other than the already selected music. In the example of FIG. 25, music K, music L, music M, music I, music B, and music C are unselected music. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the already selected music image 831 and the temporarily selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 includes a non-selected music image 834 indicating that it is a non-selected music. The non-selected music is a music that is not selected by the player although it is first displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, music I, music B, and music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed in the unselected music image 833 depending on, for example, the color, pattern, and pattern of the outline portion such as a frame, the character portion, the character background portion, and the effect color, size, and shape around the outline portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the present embodiment, the character “I hate”) is attached to the side of the non-selected music image 834, which makes it easy to distinguish the non-selected music image 834. However, the non-selected music image 834 need only be distinguishable, the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the non-selected music image 834 may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark. Absent.

In addition, an upper limit is set in advance for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the non-selected music image 834 displayed in the music selected image 83 is 3. The upper limit number of the unselected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than 3 as in the already selected music image 831. Further, when the number of unselected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of unselected songs is 1 or 2, the number of unselected song images 834 corresponding to the number of unselected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of non-selected music pieces is 0, or when the player has set not to display the non-selected music image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting process of FIG. 63, or If the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen process of FIG. 71), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. When the non-selected music images 834 are displayed, if the number of non-selected music is less than the upper limit number, unselected music images 833 other than the non-selected music images 834 are displayed for the shortage. In this way, even when the number of non-selected music images 834 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit number, the non-selected music images other than the non-selected music image 834 are replaced with the non-selected music images 834. By displaying the image 833, the specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

The selection determination section image 84 is an image imitating the selection determination section 21, and indicates that the temporarily selected music piece can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212. In the operation explanation image 85, the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and the temporarily selected music can be determined as the music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the determination button 21B. It is a thing. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the lyrics of the temporarily selected song output from the speaker 26 or the song selected by the player in accordance with the output of the song. However, the selection determination part image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or part of them may be omitted.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a case has been described as an example where a song is selected by the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, but in addition to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213 and a right selection button are also provided. The music may be selected using 214. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used to select a song from unselected songs, and the left selection button 213 and the right selection button 214 are used to select a song from already selected songs. Good. In this case, for example, by operating the up selection button 211, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain the same, the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward, and by operating the down selection button 212, The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the temporarily selected music image 832. On the other hand, when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the already selected music becomes the temporarily selected music image 832. You may make it displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display position of the selected music image 831 is predetermined, but as shown in FIG. 28, for example, by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, the selected music image 831 is not displayed. The scroll may be performed in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 together with the selected music image 833. By doing so, compared with the case where the temporarily selected music is changed by the method described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the selected music and unselected music can be used without using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212. Since the music can be provisionally selected from any of the selected music, the operability when the music is provisionally selected is improved. Note that, as shown in FIG. 28, even when the selected music image 831 is scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 together with the unselected music image 833 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, In the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display portion 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) is arranged at the position farthest from the initial provisional selection music image 832 (initial provisional selection music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2301, the MPU 51 creates an already-selected music list in order to display the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The already-selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when creating an initial arrangement rank data table (see FIG. 31) for the music selection image 83 described later, and are stored in the RAM 512 shown in FIG. 29, for example. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

Here, FIG. 29 is an example of a music selection counter data table for a plurality of music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 29, the song selection counter data table includes a selection count counter, history data regarding already-selected songs, and history data regarding unselected songs. Further, in the music selection counter data table, the music for which the already-selected flag is set to OFF is data relating to the unselected music, and the data of which the non-selection flag is set to ON is the non-selected music. Data. This music selection counter data table is updated by the music selection counter data update process of FIG. 39 described later. Details of updating the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The selection number counter is selected by the player as the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game performance from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to 20 musics of the songs A to T. The selected number of times is shown. In the present embodiment, the music rank of the selected music is determined based on the selected date and time, but when the music rank of the selected music is determined by the selection frequency, the music ranking is determined by referring to the selection count counter. ..

The history data regarding the selected music includes the music rank data and the selected flag for each of the music A to the music T.

The music order data specifies the display position of the selected music image 831, and a younger order is assigned in the ascending order of the latest selected date and time, and the display order is increased. Specifically, the display ranks of the selected music pieces are assigned to the first to third ranks with respect to the top three music pieces, and the remaining music pieces are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, “1”, “2” or “3” is written according to the display order, and “0” is written when there is no order. That is, regarding the display order of the selected music pieces, the first rank is the music piece A, the second rank is the music piece J, the third rank is the music piece D, and the remaining music pieces other than the music piece A, the music piece J, and the music piece D have no rank. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (a state in which no song selection is performed), all songs are unranked. Further, when the number of songs corresponding to the top three songs is two, only the first and second positions are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, when the number of songs corresponding to the top three songs is one, Only the first place is decided without determining the second and third places.

The already-selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 decides to set the already-selected flag to ON for a song to which any one of the display ranks 1 to 3 is assigned in the song selection counter data updating process of FIG. It is decided to set the already-selected flag to OFF for a music piece that does not have. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data relating to the already-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays it as the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a list of selected songs.

On the other hand, the history data regarding the non-selected music includes the music order data and the non-selected flag for each of the music A to the music T.

The music order data specifies the display position of the non-selected music image 834, and the younger order is assigned in ascending order of the date and time when the most recent selection was not made, and the display order is increased. As for the display order of the non-selected music pieces, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three music pieces, and the remaining music pieces have no rank. In the table shown in FIG. 29, the display ranks of the non-selected music pieces are the first music piece C, the second music piece B, and the third music piece I, and the remaining music pieces other than the music pieces C, B, and I. There is no ranking. If there are no songs corresponding to the top three songs, all the songs are unranked. Further, when the number of songs corresponding to the top three songs is two, only the first and second positions are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, when the number of songs corresponding to the top three songs is one, Only the first place is decided without determining the second and third places.

The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the non-selection music image 834 on the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 decides to set the non-selection flag to ON for the music to which any one of the display ranks 1 to 3 is assigned in the music selection counter data updating process of FIG. It is decided to set the already-selected flag to OFF for a music piece that does not have. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays the non-selected music image 834 in the music selected image 83 as shown in FIG. Create an unselected song list.

Note that the MPU 51 may assign a younger rank in the descending order of the selection frequency (for example, the cumulative selection count or the selection ratio at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) from the latest selection) in the history data regarding the already-selected songs and the non-selected songs. The display order is not limited to the upper limit of three songs as in the illustrated example, and may be another number of songs. For example, priority may be assigned to all songs.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines the temporarily selected music (initial temporary selected music) when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display portion 341 after shifting to the jackpot game. The selected music determination process is executed. Details of the initial provisional selection song determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial provisional selected song determination process of step S2303 is finished, the MPU 51 stores the initial provisional selected song determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes the initial song selection image display process (step S2305). The initial provisionally selected music stored in step S2304 is referred to when it is determined whether or not the initial provisional selected music is selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data updating process of FIG. 50 described later. Further, in the initial music selection image display processing of step S2305, the MPU 51 determines the initial arrangement for a plurality of music and transmits the initial arrangement rank data regarding this initial arrangement to the symbol display unit 341. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the selected song list table shown in FIG. 30(A), the unselected song list table shown in FIG. 30(B), and the initial provisionally selected song determined in step S2303 of FIG. It

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an initial arrangement rank data table regarding the initial arrangement ranks for a plurality of music pieces for displaying the music piece selection image 83, and FIG. 32 is an example of the initial arrangement order of the music piece selection image 83. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31, the initial array rank data table is a table of the initial array rank data, and includes array rank data relating to the initial array rank and additional data.

The arrangement rank data defines the initial arrangement rank for a plurality of music pieces AT. The initial arrangement rank is from 1st to 20th, 1st to 3rd is assigned to the selected song, and 11th to 13th is assigned to the non-selected song. Specifically, the first to third positions of the initial arrangement rank are assigned to the third, second and first ranks of the selected music list rank in the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30(A), respectively. .. According to the order of the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, the music D, the music J, and the music A are assigned to the first to third positions in the initial arrangement order, respectively. Further, the 11th to 13th positions of the initial arrangement rank are respectively assigned to the 1st, 2nd and 3rd ranks of the non-selected music ranks in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30(B). According to the rank of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30B, music I, music B, and music C are assigned to the 11th to 13th positions in the initial arrangement rank, respectively. Further, the fourth rank of the initial arrangement rank is assigned to the temporarily selected music piece. The example shown in FIG. 31 indicates that the music P is determined as the temporarily selected music in step S2303 of FIG. The 5th to 10th and 14th to 20th positions of the initial arrangement rank are assigned to unselected music other than non-selected music. Then, the non-selected songs other than the non-selected songs are assigned in ascending order of the song numbers with respect to the youngest ranking among the 5th-10th and the 14th-20th. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the music E is in the fifth rank, the music F is in the sixth rank, the music G is in the seventh rank, the music H is in the eighth rank, and the music K is The music rank is 9th, the music L is 10th, the music M is 14th, the music N is 15th, the music O is 16th, and the music Q is The music R is assigned to the music rank 17th, the music R to the music rank 18th, the music S to the music rank 19th, and the music T to the music rank 20th.

On the other hand, the additional data is music type data indicating whether the selected music is a selected music, a temporarily selected music, a non-selected music, or an unselected music other than the non-selected music, and a non-display setting for the selected music and the non-selected music. It includes data indicating whether the flag is set to on or off. Here, the non-display setting flag for the selected music and non-selected music is displayed in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 for each of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834. This is a flag that is set to ON when display is set by the player. In the present embodiment, as the non-display setting flag, the already-selected music image non-display setting flag that displays the already-selected music image 831 in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 and the non-selected music image 834 are displayed. A non-selected music image non-display setting flag displayed in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 other than 834 is included. The already-selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing shown in FIG. 63 described later or step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing shown in FIG. 71. Is set to on.

In the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 51 determines that the music A, the music J, and the music D are already selected music based on the additional data, that the non-display flag for the already selected music is set to OFF, the music M, It is possible to specify that the music I and the music B are non-selected music, that the non-display flag for the already-selected music is set to OFF, and that the music P is a temporarily selected music.

Then, according to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 31, the initial arrangements for a plurality of music pieces are in the order shown in FIG. 32, and in the music piece selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 33. It is displayed in various ways. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 is 10, the music selection images 83 for the first to tenth music in the initial arrangement order are displayed. It Further, since the non-display flag for the selected music piece is set to OFF, the music selection image 83 is displayed as including the selected music image 831. Since the initial arrangement ranks of the non-selected music pieces are assigned from 11th to 13th, the non-selected music pieces are initially arranged at the position farthest from the temporarily selected music piece. That is, when creating the initial arrangement rank data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected music pieces at a position where the minimum number of operations on the selection button 21A necessary for making the non-selected music pieces a provisionally selected music piece is the largest. Also, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display portion 341, and the player operates the lower selection button 212 to select the non-selected music. The image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

In the present embodiment, the selected songs are allotted to the first to third positions of the initial arrangement rank, and the non-selected songs are allotted to the eleventh to thirteenth positions of the initial arrangement rank. It is not necessary to group the number of selected songs in one place, and similarly, it is not necessary to group the upper limit number of unselected songs in one place. For example, as shown in FIG. , And the upper limit number of non-selected music pieces may be discretely allocated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 34, a plurality of music pieces are arranged with the music numbers as they are, and the initial arrangement order of the plurality of music pieces is determined so that the initial arrangement rank of the music piece P determined as the temporarily selected music piece is 4th. Has been done.

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection process in progress flag to ON, and ends the music selection image display process. For example, the music selection processing in progress flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to continue the music selection processing (step S2219 in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 23) and whether or not the music selection valid period has elapsed (FIG. Step S2608 in the music selection process of 39).

[Initial temporary selection song determination process]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisional selection song determination processing (step S2303 in FIG. 24). In the initial temporarily selected music determination process, the initially temporarily selected music corresponding to the initially temporarily selected music image 832 to be initially displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 of the music selected image 83 is based on the value acquired from the temporarily selected music lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial temporary selection music lottery counter to select the initial temporary selection music (step S2401), and refers to the temporary selection music lottery table and corresponds to the value of the temporary selection music lottery counter acquired in step S2401. The music to be played is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music (step S2402).

Here, FIG. 36 is an example of the temporarily selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 36, the temporary selection music lottery table associates the values of the temporary selection music lottery counter with the music pieces A to T. For example, when the value of the acquired initial temporary selection music lottery counter is “0”, the MPU 51 tentatively determines the music A as the initial temporary selection music, and the acquired value of the initial temporary selection music lottery counter is “88”. When the value of the acquired initial provisional selection song lottery counter is “155”, the song P is provisionally determined as the initial provisional selection song.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 35, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music temporarily determined as the initial provisionally selected music is a selected music or a non-selected music (dislike music), that is, whether or not the music is an unselected music. If the tentatively determined song is a selected song or a non-selected song (not an unselected song) (step S2403: Yes), the initial tentatively selected song is not determined without determining the initially tentatively selected song. The determination process ends. That is, in the next sub-timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes the initial provisional selection song determination process again to try to determine the initial provisional selection song. On the other hand, when the temporarily determined music is not the already selected music or the unselected music (when it is the unselected music) (step S2403: No), the MPU 51 determines the music temporarily determined at step S2402 as the initial temporarily selected music. Then (step S2404), the initial provisional selection song determination process is terminated. For example, whether or not it is a selected music piece or a non-selected music piece can be determined by referring to the music piece selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) and determining whether the selected flag or the non-selected flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 29, when the music piece tentatively determined by the lottery in step S2402 is the music piece A, the music piece D, or the music piece J, it is determined to be the selected music piece, and the tentatively decided music piece is the music piece B or the music piece. If it is C or music I, it is determined to be a non-selected music. As a result, songs other than the already-selected songs (song A, song D, and song J) and non-selected songs (song B, song C, and song I) are determined as initial provisionally selected songs (step S2403: No), The initial provisional selection music determination processing is repeatedly performed.

By the way, the selected song is a song that the player has listened to before by the player's selection, and the non-selected song is a song that the player has listened to by being output as an initial provisional selected song. Is. When the initial provisionally selected music is determined from the already selected music or the non-selected music, the music that the player has heard before is output, so that the chance of making the unselected music heard by the player decreases. In addition, the non-selected music is a music that the player has not selected before, and if such a music is output as the initial provisional selection music again, the player may have a feeling of disgust, and the jackpot game is sufficient. Can't entertain.

On the other hand, in step S2403, lottery is performed on the initial temporarily selected music until a music other than the selected music and the non-selected music is selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can secure the opportunity to convey. In addition, the player is bothered that a song that was previously selected as a temporarily selected song in step S2404 but not selected by the player is again selected in step S2404 and is displayed as the temporarily selected song image 832. Is released.

Note that when the player has made a non-display setting described below for the already-selected music image 831 (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen process of FIG. 63 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen process of FIG. 71). In the case where the non-display setting flag is set to ON), the music including the already selected music may be selected as the initial provisionally selected music. Similarly, when the player has made the non-display setting for the non-selected music image 834, the music including the non-selected music may be selected as the initial temporarily selected music. In other words, the already-selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial provisionally selected music only when those images 831 and 834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. ..

[Initial temporary selection music output processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisional selection music output process (step S2210 in FIG. 23). In the initial temporary selected music output processing, when the temporary selected music image 832 is first displayed on the symbol display portion 341 after shifting to the jackpot game, the speaker 26 outputs the initial temporary selected music corresponding to the initial temporary selected music image 832. Processing. In this initial provisionally selected music output process, the initial provisionally selected music is usually output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern set as default. The melody pattern defines the output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26.

Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table in which the default setting of the melody pattern is determined for each of the plurality of songs (songs A to T) for each of the temporarily selected song and the selected song. In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 38, melody pattern 1 and melody pattern 2 are defined as melody patterns. The basic unit of the melody pattern 1 is “A melody (singing part)→B melody→chorus part”, the music output is started from the A melody (singing part), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of the melody pattern 1, "A melody (singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (singing part) → ..." Becomes Note that the basic unit of the melody pattern 1 may further include an intro part (prelude part), that is, "intro part (prelude part)→A melody (singing part)→B melody→chorus part". To be In this case, the output start of the melody pattern 1 is not the A melody (singing out part) but the intro part. The basic unit of the melody pattern 2 is “chorus part→A melody (singing part)→B melody”, the music is started to be output from the chorus part, and like the melody pattern 1, the basic unit is repeatedly output. Further, in the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is set so that all of the music A to the music T are the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the temporarily selected music, the default setting for all the music pieces A to T is the melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all of the music pieces may be the melody pattern 1. The default setting of the melody pattern of the selected song will be described later in the selected song output process of FIG. 41.

Then, in the present embodiment, regarding the output of the temporarily selected music including the initially temporarily selected music, it is possible for the player to set a melody pattern different from the default setting as described later (the melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. 61). , Or the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69), if a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player. It

Furthermore, in the initial provisional selection music output process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), the melody pattern is randomly selected. , May cause inconsistency regarding the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song. For example, if the melody pattern is set to default and the output start portion of the initial provisional selection song is the hook portion, if the promotion effect flag is set to on, the output of the initial provisional selection song is started. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is synonymous with performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later).

When an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) at the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected music is generated in this way, promotion production is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial provisionally selected music. It is determined that the result is more favorable to the player than the result suggested previously. Therefore, when the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected music occurs, the player has, for example, a 5R regular jackpot in which the current gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. It can be known that either the gaming state or the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, or the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state.

By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the initial temporarily selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player interested in the effect in which the initial provisionally selected music piece is output. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect that the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song has a contradiction. Therefore, the player can confirm whether or not the finalized effect is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music, so even if the effect is not interesting to the player in the conventional game machine, Since the effect can be focused on, the player can enjoy the jackpot game effect. On the other hand, whether or not a melody pattern conflict occurs is determined by randomly selecting a melody pattern. Therefore, there is a possibility that promotion production is executed even when a melody pattern conflict does not occur. Therefore, even if no contradiction occurs in the melody pattern of the initial temporarily selected music, the promotion effect may be executed after the output of the temporarily selected music. Therefore, the player may perform the promotion effect after outputting the temporarily selected music. While expecting that, you can enjoy the jackpot game.

The initial provisional selection music output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are turned on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is turned on. To do. When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2507, and when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the process is stepped. The processing moves to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
When the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to ON. Yes (step S2502).

Here, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2502: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the default melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2503), the speaker 26 is caused to output the initial temporarily selected music from the hook portion (step S2504), and the initial temporarily selected music output processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the temporarily selected melody pattern flag is ON (step S2502: Yes), that is, when the player sets the melody pattern, the MPU 51 selects a melody pattern 1 (which is different from the default setting for the temporarily selected music). (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2505), the speaker 26 is caused to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from the A melody (singing out portion) (step S2506), and the initial provisional selection music output processing is ended.

<Step S2507>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in the present embodiment) that cause the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music. Are randomly selected (step S2507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a melody pattern (output start portion) is inconsistent when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed, and the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music is different from the default setting by the player. It is determined by random drawing of the melody pattern regardless of whether or not it is set to. Accordingly, the MPU 51 can cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2507 is melody pattern 1. When the melody pattern 1 is selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from the A melody (singing out portion) (step S2506), and performs the initial provisional selection music output processing. finish. On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisional selection music from the hook portion (step S2504), and ends the initial provisional selection music output process.

In the initial provisional selection music output process of FIG. 37, the melody pattern is randomly selected on the condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes) (step S2507). Instead of randomly selecting the pattern, whether the output contradiction (the melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected song of the melody pattern is performed as in step S2804 in the selected song output process of FIG. 41 described later. Alternatively, the lottery may be performed.

[Music selection processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection process (step S2220 of FIG. 23). In the music selection process, the player is made to select the music to be output in the jackpot game, and when the music is selected by the player, a process such as outputting the selected music is executed.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the upper selection button 211 has been operated, based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 18B).

When the upper selection button 211 is operated (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2602, and when the upper selection button 211 is not operated (step S2601: No), shifts the processing to step S2603. To do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes cursor movement display processing for moving the cursor image 836 indicating the temporarily selected music piece upward. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the cursor image 836 and the indicator image 835 (marks with “temporary” characters) are music P as shown in FIG. 27(A). Moves to the next higher song A. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. When the cursor movement display processing ends, the MPU 51 moves the processing to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the down selection button 212 has been operated based on the down selection button operation data (see FIG. 18C).

If the lower selection button 212 has been operated (step S2603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2604, and if the lower selection button 212 has not been operated (step S2603: No), the process proceeds to step S2606. To do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes the unselected music image moving display process of moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the down selection button 212 is operated in the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 51 moves the unselected music images 833 for the music E, music F, music G, music H, and music K downward. .. At this time, the unselected music image 833 for the music L is deleted, while the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, so that the temporarily selected music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

In this way, the player can change the temporarily selected music to the already selected music by operating the upper selection button 211, and can select the temporarily selected music from the unselected music by operating the lower selection button 212. Therefore, as described above, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212, so that the previously selected music that has been previously selected can be selected. , And when selecting any of the unselected music that has not been selected before, the target music can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes the temporarily selected music output process of outputting the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26, and ends the music selection process. The details of the temporarily selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated based on the enter button operation data (see FIG. 18F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by determining whether or not the operation on the decision button 21B has been started, depending on whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. to decide. When the enter button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2607, and when the enter button 21B is not operated (step S2606: No), the process moves to step S2610.

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the enter button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 increments the enter operation counter by 1 (step S2607). Whether or not the determination operation counter is the first song determination in the song selection valid period of the jackpot game in step S2802 in the selected song output process of FIG. 41 described later (for example, the period in which the opening/closing execution mode of the first R is executed) It is referred to when determining. Further, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and executes a music selection button effect for executing the music selection button effect in response to the operation of the enter button 21B at the time of selection. The process is executed (step S2609). The details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the music selection button effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether the music selection valid period has elapsed. When the music selection valid period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2611. On the other hand, when the music selection valid period has not elapsed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection process. That is, the music selection valid flag that is set to ON in step S2306 in the music selection image display process of FIG. 24 is not set to OFF (step S2612) until the music selection valid period elapses, and thus the music selection is valid. During the period, the determination as to whether or not the decision button 21B is operated in step S2606 is repeated. In other words, it is possible to select the music (change the selected music) a plurality of times during the valid music selection period. Further, during the music selection effective period, the selection of the music is enabled by the operation of the decision button 21B. Therefore, the music selection button effect (expectation suggestion effect (indication effect 1-indication effect 1 8), the probability variation fixed effect (fixed effect 1 to fixed effect 4) and the suspended condominium fixed effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4)) can also be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timings of the expectation suggesting effect, the probability variation confirming effect, and the suspended condominium confirming effect are limited within the music selection valid period. In this way, by restricting the execution timing of the music selection button effect, it is possible to prevent the decision button 21B from being operated unnecessarily to confirm whether the music selection button effect is executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection valid period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs music selection counter data update processing for updating the data in order to display the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 based on the music selection by the player. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing flag is set to OFF (step S2612), and the music selection processing ends. Details of the music selection counter data update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Temporarily selected music output process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process (step S2605 of FIG. 39). In the temporarily selected music output process, a process of outputting the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26 is executed when the temporarily selected music is changed by the player operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. In this temporarily selected music output process, the temporarily selected music is usually output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern set as default. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 38), and the melody differs from the default setting depending on the player. A pattern can be set (the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 61 or the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69). When the melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player.

Furthermore, the promotion effect flag is set to ON (promotion effect is planned to be executed in the jackpot game effect), and the melody pattern is randomly selected when the temporarily selected music piece is an unselected music piece. Therefore, a contradiction may occur regarding the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default, and the output start portion of the temporarily selected song is the hook portion, and if the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the temporarily selected song is the unselected song, The output start part of the temporarily selected music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is synonymous with performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2803 of the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later).

When an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) occurs at the output start portion of the temporarily selected music in this way, promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output before the temporarily selected music is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous to the player than the suggested result. Therefore, the player, when the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the temporarily selected music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R probability jackpot game in which the player is more advantageous than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It is possible to know that the state is one of the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, or the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state.

By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the temporarily selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player sufficiently interested in the act of temporarily selecting a music and the effect of outputting the temporarily selected music, and as a result, the player temporarily selects the music. There is even a case where the music is not changed from the initially selected music.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect that the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song has a contradiction. Therefore, the player performs the act of temporarily selecting a piece of music, and at that time pays attention to the melody pattern of the temporarily selected piece of music to confirm whether or not the finalized effect will be executed. You can fully enjoy the act of tentatively selecting a song that could not be done. Not only that, even if the effect is not interesting to the player with the conventional game machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by causing the melody pattern to be inconsistent on condition that the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of temporarily selecting the music, and the player is motivated. Unselected music can be positively selected temporarily. With this, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected songs, it is possible to give the player motivation to listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and to the player. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs.

The temporarily selected music output process having such a technical meaning will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2701>
In step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are turned on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is turned on. To do.

Here, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2702, and when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), The process moves to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected music piece is provisionally selected. If the unselected music is provisionally selected (step S2702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2703. If the unselected music is not provisionally selected (step S2702: No), the process proceeds to step S2708. To do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the temporary selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 and S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to ON.

Here, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is OFF (step S2703: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the default melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2704), the speaker 26 is caused to output the temporarily selected music from the hook portion (step S2705), and the initial temporary selected music output processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is on (step S2703: Yes), that is, when the player sets the melody pattern, the MPU 51 differs from the default setting in melody pattern 1 (see FIG. No. 38) is selected (step S2506), the speaker 26 is caused to output the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing out part) (step S2707), and the initial temporary selected music output processing is ended.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes) and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26 in advance. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). That is, the MPU 51 temporarily determines whether the melody pattern (output start portion) is inconsistent by the player on condition that the unselected music is provisionally selected when the promotion effect is planned. Whether or not the melody pattern of the selected music piece is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, the melody pattern is determined by random drawing of the melody pattern. Accordingly, the MPU 51 can cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled.

Note that, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly set on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the unselected music is temporarily selected (step S2701: Yes and step S2702: Yes). However, instead of randomly selecting the melody pattern (step S2708), an output contradiction (inconsistency of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected music of the melody pattern is selected by a lottery. You may do it. Further, in the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, the melody pattern is randomly drawn regardless of whether or not the player temporarily sets the melody pattern setting flag for the temporarily selected song. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the player setting may be prioritized and the temporarily selected music may be always output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, in the non-default state in which the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the output contradiction of the temporarily selected song is prevented from occurring, and only in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not made. A pattern conflict may occur. On the contrary, in the non-default state where the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the output conflict of the temporarily selected song occurs, and in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not made. The melody pattern inconsistency may be prevented from occurring.

Further, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly selected each time an unselected music is temporarily selected, but an upper limit may be set for the number of times the melody pattern is randomly selected. The upper limit number is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, once to 5 times. By thus setting the upper limit on the number of times that the melody pattern is randomly selected, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly and tentatively selecting unselected songs. Further, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music on condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected. However, when the already selected music is temporarily selected, the melody is selected. You may make it generate|occur|produce a contradiction in a pattern. For example, contradiction may occur in the melody pattern on condition that the already-selected music piece is provisionally selected. Moreover, contradiction of the melody pattern may occur even when either the selected song or the unselected song is provisionally selected. By doing so, even when a player who does not know the condition in which the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song on the gaming machine 10 causes a contradiction, the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song can cause a contradiction. As a result, the interest in jackpot games is improved.

[Selected music output process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the selected music output process, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 is executed when the music is selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B. In this music output process, normally, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern with default settings. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26 as described above, and the selected music is individually selected for the selected music and the unselected music. Default settings are defined. In the already-selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is set so that all of the music pieces A to T are started to be output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (singing part). In the unselected songs, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all the songs A to T are set to the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the already-selected music, the melody pattern 1 is the default setting for all the music pieces A to T, but the melody pattern 2 may be the default setting for some or all of the music pieces. In the unselected songs, the default setting for all the songs A to T is melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all of the songs may be melody pattern 1.

As for the melody pattern of the selected song, the melody pattern different from the default setting can be set by the player for each of the already selected song and the unselected song (the melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. 61, or the figure). 69 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When the melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. For example, when the selected song is the already selected song, the output starts from the melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and when the selected song is the unselected song, the output starts from the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. ..

Further, in the selected music output process, when the selected music is an unselected music in the first music selection in the music selection effective period (for example, the opening/closing execution mode of the first round), and the promotion effect flag is set to ON. In (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), the contradiction output lottery is performed to randomly select the melody pattern, which may cause an inconsistency with respect to the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start portion of the selected song is the chorus portion, and if the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the selected song is an unselected song, select The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Performing the contradiction output lottery has the same meaning as randomly selecting a melody pattern (step S2507 of the initial provisional selection music output process of FIG. 37 and step S2708 of the provisional selection music output process of FIG. 40).

In this way, when an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) at the output start portion of the selected song occurs, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is suggested before the selected song is output. It is confirmed that the result is more advantageous to the player than the result. Therefore, the player, when the output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the selected music occurs, for example, the current gaming state is a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. It is possible to know that either the 16R probability variation jackpot game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot game state.

By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player sufficiently interested in the act of selecting the music and the effect of outputting the selected music, and as a result, the player can even select the music. It may not be done.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect that the melody pattern of the selected song has a contradiction. Therefore, the player can select a song, and at that time pay attention to the melody pattern of the selected song to check whether the finalized effect is executed. You can fully enjoy the act of selecting songs that you could not do. Not only that, even if the effect is not interesting to the player with the conventional game machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by causing the melody pattern to be inconsistent on condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the action of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. The music can be actively selected temporarily. As a result, it is possible to give the player motivation to listen to the unselected music, and secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

The selected music output process having such a technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song selected by the player's operation on the enter button 21B is an unselected song. If the selected song is the unselected song (step S2801: YES), the process moves to step S2802, and if the selected song is not the unselected song, that is, if the selected song is the already selected song (step S2801: NO). No) returns the process to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) that is incremented by 1 by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is 1.

Here, if the MPU 51 is the first music determination (step S2802: YES), the process moves to step S2803, and if it is not the first music determination, that is, the second or subsequent music determination (step S2802). : No), and moves the process to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are turned on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is turned on. .. MPU51 transfers a process to step S2804, when any promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2803:Yes), and when any promotion effect flag is not set to ON (step S2803: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradiction output lottery. Inconsistent output means that when the melody pattern is set as default, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Indicates that the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by default. In the present embodiment, the contradiction output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected music piece when any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2801 and step S2803: Yes). ). Therefore, when the player selects an unselected song, the output of the song becomes inconsistent. For example, the current gaming state is the 5R regular jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player over the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 16R probability jackpot gaming state and 16R. It can be known that either the probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting the unselected music can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting the music but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in the advantageous jackpot gaming state. As a result, it is possible to give the player the motivation to positively select the unselected music so that the player can hear the unselected music, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

In addition, by limiting the contradiction output lottery to only the first song determination (step S2802: YES), the player unnecessarily repeats unselected songs for the purpose of executing the song selection button effect in the jackpot gaming state. Can be suppressed. The number of times the contradiction output lottery is performed in step S2802 is not limited to one per one big hit game, and may be performed two or more times. However, it is preferable to set the upper limit of the number of times of the inconsistent output lottery per jackpot game, from the viewpoint of preventing unnecessary selection of unselected songs.

In step S2804, in the contradiction output lottery, an unselected music piece is selected (step S2801: Yes), the music piece is determined for the first time (step S2802: Yes), and first to third promotion effect flags. It is executed on condition that any one of the above is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but that the unselected music is selected and the first music determination is made by the contradiction output lottery. Conditions can also be excluded. That is, the contradiction output lottery may be performed under the minimum condition that any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON. In this case, the contradiction output is a probability change from the 5R normal jackpot to the 5R probability jackpot. Promotion, 5R certainty variation jackpot 16R certainty variation jackpot 16R promotion, 5R normal jackpot 16R certainty variation jackpot 16R certainty variation promotion It is significant as a production that clearly shows that it is in a favorable state for the player. In addition, by selecting the unselected music as a condition of the contradiction output lottery, the player who wants to confirm that it is in an advantageous state due to the contradiction output will select the unselected music. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to. On the other hand, by setting the first music determination as the condition of the contradiction output lottery, it is possible to unnecessarily select the music to confirm whether the contradiction output is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. It is possible to suppress repetition.

<Step S2805>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the contradiction output lottery is won, and if it is won (step S2805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2806, and if not won (step S2805: No), The process moves to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
When the contradiction output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the unselected music melody pattern setting flag that is set to ON in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. 69 to ON in step S2806. Judge whether or not. The MPU 51 sets the unselected melody pattern setting flag to ON (step S2806: Yes), that is, sets the melody pattern 1 different from the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). , The melody pattern 2 which is the default setting for executing the contradiction output is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2806: No), that is, when the melody pattern 2 of default setting is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes the contradiction output. To do so, a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
When the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: YES), when the first song is not decided (when the song is decided after the second time) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags are set to ON (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 sets the unselected music melody pattern setting flag to ON in step S2809 without executing the contradiction output lottery (step S2804). Judge whether or not. Further, in step S2809, the MPU 51 also determines whether or not the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the contradiction output lottery is not won (step S2805: No). The MPU 51 sets the unselected melody pattern setting flag to ON (step S2809: YES), that is, sets the melody pattern 1 different from the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). , The melody pattern 1 that causes the selected music to be output from the A melody (singing out part) without executing the contradiction output (step S2808). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), that is, when the default melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes the conflict output. Instead, the default melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus portion of the selected song is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
When the selected music is not the unselected music (when the selected music is the already selected music) (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 in step S2810 causes the already selected music set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the melody pattern setting flag is set to ON. If the already-selected melody pattern setting flag for the selected tune is set to ON (step S2810: Yes), that is, if the melody pattern 2 different from the default setting is set, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradiction output and selects the selected tune. The melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus part of is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the already-selected music piece melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), that is, when the melody pattern of the default setting is set, the MPU 51 does not perform the contradiction output and outputs the selected music piece. The melody pattern 1 to be output from the A melody (singing part) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the melody pattern of the selected song is selected (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected song with the selected melody pattern from the speaker 26 (step S2811) and updates the memory of the selected song (step S2812). , And ends the selected music output process. By updating the memory of the selected music when the music is selected, even if the music is selected a plurality of times during the effective music selection period, the last selected music during the effective music selection period can be specified. .. Further, by being able to specify the last selected song in the song selection valid period, it is possible to update the song rank of the already selected song in the song selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) based on the finally selected song.

In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 41, the contradiction output lottery is performed when the unselected music is selected, but the contradiction output lottery may be performed when the already selected music is selected. Also in this case, when the contradiction output lottery is won, for example, the current game state is one of the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state, or It can be known that the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Further, even when the inconsistent output lottery is performed when the already selected music piece is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit to the number of times of the inconsistent output lottery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting the selected music in the jackpot gaming state.

[Music selection button effect processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the music selection button effect process, an unselected song is selected when the promotion effect flag that is set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON (when it is planned to execute the promotion effect). In this case, the music selection button effect is determined, and the determined music selection button effect is executed. The music selection button effect is an expectation suggesting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed, and a probability variation confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed. That is, in the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect is executed later, the expectation suggestion effect and the probability variation confirmation effect are executed in accordance with the music piece deciding operation.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, when a decision operation is performed on a decision button 21B for deciding a song, a suggestion effect or a promotion effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed. There was no one that executes the definite change finalization effect that explicitly states. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has not been able to make the player sufficiently interested in the act of selecting the music and the effect when the selected music is selected, and as a result, the player does not even select the music. Sometimes it doesn't.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is executed at the time of selecting a music, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed by the music selection button effect. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a song, and by paying attention to the song selection button effect executed at that time, the action of selecting a song that cannot be fully enjoyed by a conventional gaming machine is performed. You can enjoy. Not only that, even if the effect is not interesting to the player with the conventional game machine, the effect can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by causing the melody pattern to be inconsistent on condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the action of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. The music can be actively selected temporarily. As a result, it is possible to give the player motivation to listen to the unselected music, and secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

The music selection button effect processing having such a technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2901>
In step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song selected by the player's operation on the enter button 21B is an unselected song. When the selected song is the unselected song (step S2901: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2902, and when the selected song is not the unselected song, that is, when the selected song is the already selected song (step S2901: No), the music selection button effect processing is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

Here, it is possible to execute the music selection button effect on condition that the unselected music is selected by determining whether or not the unselected music is determined in step S2901. Therefore, the music selection button effect (expectation degree suggestion effect (implication effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) shown in FIG. 44 to be described later), probability variation definite effect (confirmation effect 1 to confirmation effect 4), and suspended condominium confirmation effect (decision effect 2 and confirmation) A player who desires to execute the effect 4)) can be made to actively select an unselected music piece. This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various music prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music piece is selected, but the music selection button effect may be executed even when the already selected music piece is selected. .. By doing so, the operation on the selection determining unit 21 for selecting a music can be enjoyed not only as an operation for simply selecting a music but also as an operation for executing a music selection button effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music, and the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game can be increased to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) that is incremented by 1 by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is 1. When the MPU 51 determines the first song (step S2902: YES), the process proceeds to step S2903, and when the first song is not determined, that is, when the second and subsequent songs are determined (step S2902: No). The music selection button effect processing is ended without executing the music selection button effect.

Here, by determining whether or not it is the first music determination in step S2902, the number of times the music selection button effect is executed is limited to one time of the first music determination when an unselected music is selected. To be done. Thereby, when executing the music selection button effect, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly and unnecessarily selecting music in the jackpot gaming state without sufficiently listening to the unselected music.

The number of times the music selection button effect is executed is not limited to once per one big hit game, but may be executed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 to 5 times) for the number of times of the music selection button effects for one jackpot game, from the viewpoint of preventing unnecessary selection of unselected music.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag which is set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. When the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2904, and when the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 includes a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, and a 5R certainty variation confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state. 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed. Details of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag that is set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2906, and turns on the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag. If not set (step S2905: NO), the music selection button effect processing is ended without executing the music selection button effect.

In the music selection button effect process of FIG. 42, the music selection button effect may be executed on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF for this music selection button effect. You may make it perform to. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF, as the music selection button effect, only the suggestion effect that suggests the expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the probability variation jackpot gaming state is executed, and the probability variation jackpot gaming state. The probability variation finalization effect that clearly indicates that is not executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 has a music selection button effect including a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and a 16R certainty variation confirmation effect that clearly indicates the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state. 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed. Details of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

<S2907>
When the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag that is set to ON to OFF (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not no effect (see FIGS. 45 and 48) is selected in the 5R certainty variation selection button effect determination process or the 16R certainty variation selection button effect determination process. When no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect processing without executing the music selection button effect. On the other hand, when no effect is selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect selected in the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation selection button effect determination process (step S2909), The music selection button effect processing is ended.

Here, the music selection button effect processing is executed when the music selection processing in-progress flag is set to ON (step S2219: Yes and S2220 in FIG. 23). That is, the music selection button effect process is executed for the first music determination operation until the music selection effective period elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary selection of music for checking whether or not the music selection button effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process]
43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R certainty variation selection button effect determination process (step S2904 in FIG. 42). In the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, a music selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when music selection is performed by a determination operation on the determination button 21B in the music selection effective period is determined. In the following, before explaining the 5R probability variation selection song effect determination process, for determining the song selection button effect table showing the degree of expectation of various song selection effects shown in FIG. 44 and the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. The 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the music selection button effect table, suggestion effects 1 to 8 and fixed effects 1 to 4 are defined as the types of the music selection button effects depending on the degree of expectation (probability change expectation) for the probability variation big hit. Suggestion productions 1 to 8 are expectation suggestion productions that suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, the fixed effects 1 to 4 are effects that clearly show that the jackpot that has triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability-varying jackpot, and are probability-determining determined effects in which the probability probability expectation is 100%.

The suggestion effect 1 is an effect in which the mini character A is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a music, and the probability of probability change is 10%.

The suggestion effect 2 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to blue by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting the music, and the probability of probability of probability change is 10%.

The suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the mini character B is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a music, and the probability of probability change is 20%.

The suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to yellow by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a song, and the probability of probability change is 20%.

The suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which the mini-characters A and B are displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a music, and the probability of probability change is 30%.

The suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to red by the operation of the enter button 21B at the time of selecting a music, and the probability of probability of probability change is 50%.

The suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which the mini character C is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a song, and the probability of probability change is 66%.

The suggestion effect 8 is an effect in which the mini-characters A, B, and C are displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by operating the enter button 21B during song selection and by operating the enter button 21B during song selection, and the probability of probability change is 80%. It is a production.

The final effect 1 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to a rainbow color by the operation of the enter button 21B at the time of selecting a song, and becomes an opportunity to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It is a 5R certainty variation finalization effect that clearly shows that the big jackpot is a 5R certainty variation big jackpot.

The fixed effect 2 is an effect in which the special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting the music, and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certainty variation jackpot. It is a definite change confirmation effect that is clearly shown. In addition, the finalized effect 2 is a jackpot (5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot or 5R regular jackpot) as winning/deciding information in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. Is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time saving mode, the holding condominium that clearly shows that the holding condominium in which a big jackpot is generated by the second suspension is executed. It is also a confirmed production.

In the finalization effect 3, a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitched operation sound such as “picone”) whose operation sound when the decision button 21B is operated during music selection is different from the normal operation is output by the operation of the decision button 21B during music selection. It is an effect, and is a 16R certainty variation finalization effect that clearly shows that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certainty variation jackpot.

The fixed effect 4 is an effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a song, and the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state. Is a probability variation confirmed effect that clearly indicates that 16R is a probability variation jackpot. In addition, the finalized effect 4 is a jackpot (5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot or 5R regular jackpot) as winning/deciding information in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. Is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time saving mode, the holding condominium that clearly shows that the holding condominium in which a big jackpot is generated by the second suspension is executed. It is also a confirmed production.

In addition, although the holding condominium confirmation effect also corresponds to the probability change confirmation effect, the music selection button effect setting screen processing (FIGS. 66 and 67) described later and the music selection button effect setting history screen processing described later (FIGS. 73 and 74). (See), it is defined separately from the probability variation finalization effect.

As shown in FIG. 45, the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table is referred to when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B within the song selection valid period in the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each of the tables A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button effect lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the effect type is defined, and the music selection button effect can be determined according to the count value of the music selection button effect lottery counter. Has been In addition, in the tables A1 to A4, the song selection button effect lottery counters are not allocated to the suggestion effects 1 to 8 indicating the probability variation expectation that the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, in the tables A5 to A8, the music selection button effect lottery counters are allocated to the suggested effects 1 to 8, and any of the suggested effects 1 to 8 may be determined. In the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, since the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state is referred to, the confirmation effect 3 and the confirmation effect 4 which clearly indicate that the 16R probability variation jackpot is not defined.

Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only "no effect" is determined in which the 5R certainty variation selection music button effect is not executed even by the operation of the decision button 21B during music selection. That is, in the table A1, none of the “implication effect 1” to “implication effect 8”, “determined effect 1” and “determined effect 2” are selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A2 is a table in which "no effect", or only "determined effect 2" which is the probability variation confirmed effect and the reserved holidaymaker confirmed effect is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of selecting the music. That is, in the table A2, "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8" and "confirmation effect 1" are not selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A3 is a table in which "no effect" or "determined effect 1" which is a probability variation confirmed effect is determined by operating the determination button 21B when selecting a music piece. That is, in the table A3, "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8" and "confirmation effect 2" are not selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A4 is a table in which "no effect", "determined effect 1" or "determined effect 2" is determined by operating the enter button 21B when selecting a song. That is, in the table A4, "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8" are not selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A5 is a table in which "no effect" or "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8" is determined by operating the determination button 21B when selecting a music piece. That is, in the table A5, "confirmation effect 1" and "confirmation effect 2" are not selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A6 is a table in which "no effect", "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8", or "confirmation effect 2" is determined by operating the decision button 21B when selecting a music piece. That is, in the table A6, "confirmation effect 1" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

The table A7 is a table in which "no effect", "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8", or "determined effect 1" is determined by operating the decision button 21B when selecting a music piece. That is, in the table A7, "confirmation effect 2" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

The table A8 is a table in which "no effect", "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8", "confirmation effect 1", or "confirmation effect 2" is determined by the operation of the determination button 21B during music selection. .. That is, in the table A8, any of "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8", "determined effect 1" and "determined effect 2" can be selected as the music selection button effects.

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the 5R certainty variable selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the conditions for selecting the tables A1 to A8, and is referred to in the 5R certainty variation selection song effect production determination process shown in FIG. 43. The 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved holidaymaker flags and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting made by the player as to whether or not to execute each of the expectation suggesting effect, the probability change confirming effect, and the holding condominium confirming effect. When it is set by the player that the expectation suggestion effect is not executed, the degree of expectation is determined in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 or step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73. The suggestive effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Similarly, according to the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing of FIG. 66 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. The fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the on-hold condominium flag indicates that the on-hold condominium is executed, and is set to ON in step S2205 of FIG.

In the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in the table A1 in which only "no effect" is determined, the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag is turned on as the game setting, and the probability change finalization effect non-execution setting flag is turned on, If the suspended holiday confirmation final production non-execution setting flag is on, and the suspended consecutive holidays flag is on, or the expectation suggestive production non-execution setting flag is on, the probability variation confirmed production non-execution setting flag is on, and the suspended holiday club flag is Selected when off. Note that, like the table A1, the table A2 to the table A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the holding condominium flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process, in step S3001, the MPU 51 turns on the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag that is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73. Or not is set. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the expectation suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the gaming state is the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state, even if the enter button 21B at the time of music selection is operated. It is determined whether or not the anticipation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set. When the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002, and the expectation degree When the suggested effect non-execution is set to OFF (when the expectation degree suggested effect non-execution is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the certainty change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag that is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 is a setting that does not execute the probability variation confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability variation jackpot game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state, even if the decision button 21B at the time of selecting the music is operated. It is determined whether the performance non-execution setting is set. When the probability variation final effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the probability variation final effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3003, and the probability variation final effect non-execution. When the execution setting flag is set to OFF (when the probability variation finalized effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a holding holiday club flag indicating execution of the holding holiday club set in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is turned on. MPU51 transfers a process to step S3004, when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), processing To step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 does not execute the pending condominium confirmation effect which is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the setting flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold-consultation-confirmation effect non-execution setting, which is a setting for not executing the reservation-consultation-confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the reservation condominium is to be performed, is set. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3005 when the on-hold holidays confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (when the on-hold holidays confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), When the suspension game confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (when the suspension conference confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 (see FIG. 45) that selects “no effect” no matter which button random selection random number value is selected. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variation). In the case where the finalized effect non-execution setting is set (step S3002: Yes), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), and the reserved condominium finalized effect non-execution setting flag is set to on ( (When the pending holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3004: Yes), the table A1 is selected as the 5R certainty variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3005, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. Even if the setting is made (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3002: Yes) and the holding condominium flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the table A1 is the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table. Is selected (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 is performed (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A2 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “confirmation effect 2” that is the 5R probability change finalization effect and the pending holiday home finalization effect exists. To do. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variation). When the finalized effect non-execution setting is performed (step S3002: Yes), the holding holiday club flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), and the pending holiday game finalized effect non-execution setting flag is set to off ( When the suspension game determination effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the table A2 is selected as the 5R certainty variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery in the table A2 is performed (step S3007), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the holding condominium flag indicating that the holding condominium set in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is executed is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3009 when the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the processing when the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3008: No). To step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the on-hold condominium determination effect non-execution setting flag that is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to ON. MPU51 transfers a process to step S3010, when the reservation consecutive holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), and the reservation consecutive holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3009: No), the process proceeds to step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “confirmation effect 1” which is the 5R certainty confirmation effect is present. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (probability variation). The finalization effect non-execution setting is not set (step S3002: No), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. In that case (when the holding holiday condominium fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3009: Yes), the table A3 is selected as the 5R certainty variable selection song effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting) (step S3001: Yes), and turns the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag OFF. Even if it is set (probability variation finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3002: No) and the holding condominium flag is set to OFF (step S3008: No), 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table The table A3 is selected as (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 is performed (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "determined effect 1" and "determined effect 2" exists. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (probability variation). The finalization effect non-execution setting is not set (step S3002: No), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. In such a case (when the holding holiday condominium fixed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 is performed (step S3011), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines in step S3012 whether or not the probability variation confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the probability variation final production effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3012: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3013, and when the probability variation final production effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3012). S3012: No), and moves the process to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the holding holiday club flag is set to ON. MPU51 transfers a process to step S3014, when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No), processing To step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the on-hold holidaymaker confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. MPU51 transfers a process to step S3015, when the reservation consecutive holiday confirmation production non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3014: Yes), and the reservation consecutive holiday confirmation demonstration non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If it is (step S3014: No), the process proceeds to step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “indication effect 1” to “indication effect 8” exists. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (Probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3012: Yes), the reserved holidaymaker flag is set to on (step S3013: Yes), and the reserved holidaymaker finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. In this case (when the suspension holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3014: YES), the table A5 is selected as the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3015, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probability change finalized effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3012: Yes), and the holding condominium flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No), 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table The table A5 is selected as (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 is performed (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A6 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “implication effect 1” to “implication effect 8” and “confirmation effect 2” exists. To do. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (Probability change finalization effect non-execution setting has been made) (step S3012: Yes), the holding condominium flag is set on (step S3013: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization non-execution setting flag is set to off. When (holding consecutive holidays fixed production non-execution setting is not made) (step S3014: No), table A6 is selected as the 5R certainty variation selection button presentation lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A6 is performed (step S3016), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation music selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3017>
When both the degree-of-expectation suggesting production non-execution setting flag and the probability variation confirmed production non-execution setting flag are set to OFF (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the holding holiday club is set to ON. It is determined (step S3017). MPU51 transfers a process to step S3018, when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to ON (step S3017:Yes), and when a reservation consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3017:No), processing To step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the on-hold vacation home determination effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. MPU51 transfers a process to step S3019, when the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3018: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3018: No), the process proceeds to step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “indication effect 1” to “indication effect 8” and “confirmation effect 1” exists. To do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. (Probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3012: No), the reserved holidaymaker flag is set to on (step S3017: Yes), and the reserved holidaymaker confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. If so (when the setting for non-execution of reserved holiday condominium is set) (step S3018: Yes), the table A7 is selected as the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3019, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (probability variation finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3012: No), and even when the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3017: No), 5R probability variation selection button The table A7 is selected as the effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 is performed (step S3019), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certainty variation selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 uses the table A8 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “indication effect 1” to “indication effect 8”, “determined effect 1” and “determined effect 2” exists. Perform music selection button production lottery. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. (Probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3012: No), the reserved holidaymaker flag is set to on (step S3017: Yes), and the reserved holidaymaker finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If so (when the setting for non-execution of reserved holiday condominium is not set) (step S3018: No), the table A8 is selected as the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A8 is performed (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3006) and ends the 5R certainty variation selection music button effect determination process.

[16R probability variation selection button effect determination process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of 16R certainty variation selection button effect determination processing (step S2906 of FIG. 42). In the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. 48, the music selection button effect executed when the determination button 21B is operated based on the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table for determining the 16R probability variation song selection effect selection table. (Including no staging). The 16R probability variation selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process described above. In the 5R probability variation selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. Each of “A8” may be read as “table B1” to “table B8”.

The 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B within the song selection valid period in the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and stores eight lottery tables B1 to B8. The 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table is basically the same as the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, but "determination effect 3" is defined in place of "determination effect 1" in the 5R probability variation selection button effect lottery table. Thus, instead of the “determined effect 2”, the “determined effect 4” is defined. That is, in the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, since the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is referred to, the fixed effect 1 and the confirmation effect 3 that clearly indicate that the 5R probability variation jackpot is not defined. The detailed description of the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table is omitted.

In addition, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the conditions for selecting the tables B1 to B8, and is referred to in the 16R probability variation selection music button production determination process shown in FIG. 47. The 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved holidaymaker flags and the tables B1 to B8. In addition, the game setting and the reserved holidaymaker flag are synonymous with the case of the 5R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table determination table. In the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in the table B1 (see FIG. 48) in which only "no effect" is determined, the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag is turned on as the game setting, and the probability variation final effect non-execution is performed. If the setting flag is on, the suspended holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on, and the suspended holiday team flag is on, or the expectation suggestive production non-execution setting flag is on, the probability variation confirmed production non-execution setting flag is on, and This is selected when the holding holiday club flag is off. Note that, like the table B1, the table B2 to the table B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved holiday club flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 49.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, in the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination processing, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability change The confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3102: Yes), the holding holiday club flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), and the holding holiday home confirmation effect is not set. When the execution setting flag is set to ON (when the holding holiday condominium final production non-execution setting is set) (step S3104: Yes), any button lottery random number counter is used as the 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery table. Even if the value of is selected, the table B1 (see step S3105) (see FIG. 48) for selecting “no effect” is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and sets the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probability variation). Even if the finalized effect non-execution setting is made (step S3102: Yes), and the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the table B1 is selected as the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table ( Step S3105) (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B1 is performed (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned ON. It is set (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3102: Yes), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If there is (holding condominium confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3104: No), 16R certainty variation selection button effect lottery table, 16R certainty variation finalization effect and pending condominium confirmation production, "confirmation production. A button B for selecting "4" is selected (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery in the table B2 is performed (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certainty variation selection music button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108 to 3111>
Further, in step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. It is set (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3102: No), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. When it is set (holding consecutive holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3109: Yes), the 16R certainty variation fixed production “determined production 3” is set as the 16R certainty variation music selection button effect lottery table. The table B3 in which the value of the selected button lottery random number is present is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table is set even if the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not set (step S3102: No) and the holding holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No). The table B3 is selected as (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B3 is performed (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing.

On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. It is set (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3102: No), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. When it is set (when the holding holiday condominium fixed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3109: No), the "confirmed effect 3" and "determined effect 4" are set as the 16R certainty variable selection button effect lottery table. The table B4 in which the value of the selected button lottery random number is present is selected (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table B4 (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. Is set to (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3112: Yes), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3113: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. When (holding consecutive holidays fixed production non-execution setting is set) (step S3114: Yes), "indication production 1" to "indication production 8" are selected as the 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery table. The table B5 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation finalized effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probability change finalized effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3112: Yes), and even when the holding condominium flag is set to OFF (step S3113: No), 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table The table B5 is selected as (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B5 is performed (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 sets the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3112: Yes), the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the pending consecutive holidays final production non-execution setting flag is set. When it is set to OFF (when the setting for non-execution of the pending holiday condominium is not set) (step S3114: No), as the 16R probability variation selection button effect lottery table, "indication effect 1" to "indication effect 8" Table B6 where the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "" and "confirmation effect 4" exists (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B6 is performed (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the holding holiday club flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to off (no anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: No), and turns off the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set (the probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3112: No), the holding condominium flag is set to on (step S3117: Yes), and the reservation condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. If the setting is set to No. (holding consecutive holiday confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3118: Yes), the 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table is set as “indication effect 1” to “indication effect 8” and “determination effect”. The table B7 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "3" exists is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probability variation final effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3112: No), and even when the holding consecutive holidays flag is set to OFF (step S3117: No), the 16R probability variation song selection button The table B7 is selected as the effect lottery table (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B7 is performed (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing.

On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 sets the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the anticipation degree suggestive effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (probability change finalization effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3112: No), the holding holiday club flag is set to on (step S3117: Yes), and the pending holiday home confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (when the pending holiday condominium final production non-execution setting is not made) (step S3118: No), as the 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery table, "indication production 1" to "indication production" 8", "confirmed effect 3", and "confirmed effect 4" are selected, the table B8 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery in the table B8 is performed (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the holding consecutive holidays flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

[Music selection counter data update process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update processing (step S2611 in the music selection processing of FIG. 39). In the music selection counter data update processing, it is necessary for the music selection image display processing (see FIG. 24) and the initial provisional selection music determination processing (FIG. 35) depending on the selection status of the music by the player during the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. The music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated. As a result, it becomes possible to create an already-selected music list (see FIG. 30A) and a non-selected music list (see FIG. 30B) necessary for displaying the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is possible to create the initial array rank data (see FIG. 31). As a result, by updating the song selection counter data in the song selection counter data updating process, the song selection image 83 displayed in the next jackpot game reflects the song selection state by the player in the jackpot game this time, The music selection image 83 has high operability for the music selection for the player.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a storage of the initial provisionally selected music that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 in step S2304 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. (Step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102. If the initial provisionally selected music is not stored (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selected by the MPU as the initial temporarily selected music (step S2404 in FIG. 35) has been selected as the selected music by the player, and the initial temporarily selected music is the selected music. If it is (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3106, and if the initial provisionally selected song is not selected (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (A1) and FIG. 51 (A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, the MPU selects the music F having the music number 6 as the temporarily selected music, and the game is played. If the person does not select the music F, the music F is stored in the first rank of the non-selected music list rank, and the second and third ranks of the non-selected music list rank are respectively the non-selected music list before the update. The song I of song number 9 which was ranked first and the song B of song number 2 which was ranked second are stored. Further, the music C of the music number 3 having the oldest non-selected date and time among the non-selected music whose rank of the non-selected music list was 3rd before the update is set to 0th and changed to the unselected music.

In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. The non-selection flag is updated by, for example, when the non-selected music list rank is updated from FIG. 51(A1) to FIG. This is done by setting the selection flag to OFF and setting the non-selection flag of the music F whose rank of the non-selected music list is changed from 0 to 1 to ON. When the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table is updated (step S3203), the memory of the initial provisionally selected music stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
In step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song that can be stored in the RAM 512 is stored in step S2812 in the selected song output process of FIG. 41, and if the selected song is stored (step S3205: Yes), When the process proceeds to step S3106 and the selected song is not stored (step S3205: No), the song selection counter data update process is ended.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the already-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51(B1) and FIG. 51(B2) as an example, when the player selects the song E of song number 5 as the selected song in the state of the song selection counter data table shown in FIG. Adds 1 to the selection number counter of the music E. Further, the music E is stored in the first selected music list ranking, and the second and third selected music list rankings are respectively assigned to the music number 1 which is the first selected music list ranking before updating. The music A and the music D of the music number 4 which was the second place are stored. Further, the song D having the song number 4 with the oldest selection date and time among the already-selected songs having the third-ranked already-selected song list prior to the update is set to the 0th position and is changed to the unselected song.

In step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the already-selected flag. The update of the already-selected flag is performed, for example, when the non-selected song rank is updated from FIG. 51(B1) to FIG. 51(B2), the already-selected song list rank is changed from 3rd to 0th. This is performed by setting the flag to OFF and setting the already-selected flag of the music E whose rank of the selected music list is changed from 0 to 1 to ON. When the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the already-selected music in the music selection counter data table is updated (step S3206), the MPU 51 clears the memory of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207), and the music selection counter concerned. The data update process ends.

When a music piece is selected from the non-selected music pieces, the music piece is changed from the non-selected music piece to the already-selected music piece. For example, when the music B having the second unselected music rank in FIG. 51(A1) is selected, the first rank of the already-selected music rank data is changed to the music B. On the other hand, in the non-selected music rank data, the music B is deleted from the second place, the music C in the third place is moved up to the second place, and the corresponding third place is updated with no corresponding music. Further, the non-selection flag of the music B is set to OFF and the already-selected flag of the music B is set to ON. That is, by selecting a song from the non-selected songs, the information about the non-selection of the song is cleared from the song selection counter data, while the information that the song is a selected song is included. The addition is executed.

Further, when the rank of the already-selected music list is determined not by the newest selection date and time but by the selection frequency, the data regarding the already-selected music is updated based on the selection count counter of the music E. For example, when the player selects the song E having the song number 5 in the state of the song selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, the selection count counter for the song E is already updated from 0 to 1. There is no change in the ranking of the selected song list. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the rank of the selected music list and the selected flag. In addition, when the list position of the selected song is determined by the selection frequency, if the rank of the selected song list is changed, the selected song is followed by the same procedure as the case of updating the data related to the selected song in ascending order of the selection date and time. The list rank and the selected flag are updated.

[Game setting process]
Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15). In the game setting process, the jackpot is hit in response to the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B) while the game times effect and the jackpot game effect are not executed. The game setting for the game effect is executed.

By the way, as a conventional game, there is one in which the player can set game settings relating to various effects executed by using the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, etc., such as selection of characters appearing in the game times effect and the jackpot game effect. is there. In such a gaming machine, the player can customize the performance according to his/her preference by setting the game settings relating to various performances by selecting a favorite character or the like, and a game time performance or a jackpot. You can enjoy the game production even more.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a new feature as a big hit game effect, as compared to the conventional gaming machine as described above. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 on the symbol display portion 341 in the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 25). ). Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, before the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the currently suggested gaming state is executed, the initial temporarily selected music piece. It is specified that the promotion effect is executed by causing the melody pattern of the music piece to be inconsistent when the temporarily selected music piece including the selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the speaker 26, and a determination operation for the determination button 21B when the music piece is selected. In accordance with the above, a music selection button effect that suggests or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed.

Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a process is carried out when the player sets a game for a jackpot game effect having a new feature with respect to the conventional gaming machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, the music list display setting relating to the display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the music selection image display screen 82 in accordance with the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21. The melody pattern setting for the temporarily selected music and the selected music and the music selection button effect setting for setting execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect are executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can perform the music list display setting, the melody pattern setting, and the music selection button effect setting which are not included in the conventional game setting items, as the game setting of the jackpot game effect.

Here, in the music list display setting, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, FIG. Can be set to show or hide. This allows the player to customize the music selection image 83 in a desired display mode. In addition, for example, by setting a display mode of preference such as hiding information regarding past music selections that the player determines is unnecessary, the player performs temporary selection and selection of music without stress. be able to.

Further, in the melody pattern setting, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 70, a melody pattern of a temporarily selected music piece or a selected music piece (unselected music piece and already selected music piece) can be set. As a result, the player can not only output the temporarily selected music piece and the selected music piece with default settings, but also output the parts other than the default settings. As a result, the range of selection of the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music is widened, and the player can output the temporarily selected music and the selected music at his or her own discretion, so that the temporary selection can be performed according to the player's preference. You can enjoy songs and selected songs.

Further, in the music selection button effect setting, whether or not the music selection button effect is executed can be set as described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 74. As a result, when the player makes a setting to execute the music selection button effect, the player may perform the operation (the operation for the decision button 21B in the music selection, the promotion effect) to be executed by the music selection button effect. Can be enjoyed as an act to know. On the other hand, if the player does not execute the music selection button effect, he/she cannot know in advance whether or not the promotion effect will be executed. Therefore, the promotion effect even after the music selection is performed. Can maintain a sense of anticipation for being executed. Therefore, since it is possible to select whether or not to execute the music selection button effect setting, it becomes possible to enjoy how the player can enjoy whether or not the promotion effect is performed.

The game setting process having such a technical meaning will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. However, before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a shift example of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the main menu 921 does not shift to a top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B)), a demo screen, and a power saving screen, which will be described later, even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display. The following description will be made assuming that a fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53(A)) described below is maintained and the game can be set after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed, and when the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed, the game is automatically operated regardless of the operation of the player. Alternatively, the screen may shift to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B)).

As shown in FIG. 53(A), when the variable display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are “0”, and the main symbol 921 is not transferred to the jackpot gaming state. The fluctuation stop screen 92 in which the fluctuation is stopped is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed, the display screen changes from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 53(B). Transition. The top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937.

The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images for showing a plurality of selectable items and for allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selected images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting the display screen of the transfer destination. The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 include a “game setting customization” selection image 933 for performing game settings and the like during a jackpot game, and a “end” selection image 935 for shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the fluctuation stop screen 92. including.

The cursor image 936 of the top menu screen 93 is an image showing the item temporarily selected at present. In addition, in the temporarily selected selection image 933 (FIG. 53(B)), the selection image 933 of "game setting customization" is selected in order to emphasize that it is temporarily selected. It is displayed in a manner distinguishable from 934 and 935. This point is the same as the temporarily selected music image 832 (see FIG. 25) in the music selection image 83 described above.

The selection deciding unit image 937 of the top menu screen 93 is an image simulating the selection deciding unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and indicates that a desired item from a plurality of items can be selected by operating the selection deciding unit 21. It is an image. In the selection determination part image 937, the image corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 is marked with “SELECT”, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are highlighted. Is displayed. Further, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be highlighted by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determination part image 937, the character “decision” is attached to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, which indicates that the operation should be performed when the temporarily selected item is selected. The display example of the selection determination part image 937 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 53B, but can be changed as appropriate.

In the top menu screen 93, when the player selects any item (selected images 931 to 935) from the plurality of items by operating the decision button 21B, a display screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the player selects the "game setting customization" selection image 933, the game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. 53C is displayed. The game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941 to 945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937. Note that the cursor image 936 and the selection determination part image 937 are the same as those in the case of the top menu screen 93, so description thereof will be omitted. Also in the following, if the cursor image 936 and the selection determination part image 937 of the top menu screen 93 are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 of the game setting screen 94 show a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transfer destination) and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 include a selection image 943 of “normal song selection setting”, a selection image 944 of “setting history song selection setting”, a selection image 945 of “return to top menu”, and the like.

Here, FIG. 54(A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 similarly to FIG. 53(C), and FIGS. 54(B), 54(C) and 54(D) respectively. It is an example of a display screen that is shifted from the game setting screen 94. Specifically, FIG. 54(B) is an example of the setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 54(C) is an example of the setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 54(D) is the same as FIG. 53(B). 2 is an example of a top menu screen 93. That is, when the selection image 943 of "normal song selection setting" is selected on the game setting screen shown in FIG. 54(A), the display screen moves from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95, and "setting" When the selection image 944 of “History selection” is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 54C, and the selection image 965 of “Return to top menu” is displayed. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-mentioned top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 54(D). The setting item selection screen 95 will be described below with reference to FIG. 55, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

The setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 55 is a screen that allows individual selection of items related to song selection in the jackpot game. The setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selected images 951 to 955. The “melody pattern” selection image 951 is an image selected when performing the melody pattern setting of the music selection setting items. When the selection image 951 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97. The selection image 952 of “music list display” is an image selected when performing the music list display setting of the music selection setting items. When the selected image 952 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The selection image 953 of “music selection button effect” is an image selected when performing the music selection button effect setting of the music selection setting items. When the selection image 953 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99. The “back one” selection image 954 is an image selected when the display screen is returned by one. When the selection image 954 is selected, the display screen is changed from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54(A)) which is the display screen before the change to the setting item selection screen 95. A “return to top menu” selection image 955 is an image to be selected when the display screen is returned to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 955 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)).

The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 56 is a screen that displays the setting history of items related to song selection in the winning game and allows individual selection of items related to song selection in the jackpot game. The setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selected images 961 to 965. The “melody pattern setting history” selection image 961 is an image to be selected when the melody pattern is set based on the melody pattern setting history. When the selected image 961 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87. The “music list display setting history” selection image 962 is an image to be selected when performing music list display setting based on the music list display setting history. When the selected image 962 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88. The selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is an image to be selected when performing the music selection button effect setting based on the setting history of the music selection button effect. When the selected image 963 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The "back one" selection image 964 is an image selected when the display screen is returned by one. When the selection image 964 is selected, the display screen is changed from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 54(A)) which is the display screen before the change to the setting history selection screen 96. The “return to top menu” selection image 965 is an image to be selected when the display screen is returned to the top menu screen 93. When the selected image 965 is selected, the display screen moves from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 52, in step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53(A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. 15 is 0, and the variable stop in the top menu screen process of FIG. 58 described later is stopped. Whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 is determined depending on whether or not the fluctuation stop screen display flag that is set to ON in the screen transition processing is ON.

If the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3402. If the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3401: No), the process proceeds to step S3403. To do.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a top menu screen display flag that is set to ON in the top menu screen transition process such as step S3504 of the game start standby process of FIG. 57 described later and step S3711 of the game setting screen process of FIG. 59 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 is determined based on whether or not it is on. When the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3404, and when the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: No), the process proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
In step S3404, the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54(A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 turns on the game setting screen display flag that is set to ON in the game setting screen transition processing such as step S3609 of the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58 and step S3813 of the setting item selection processing of FIG. 60 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 is determined based on whether or not. If the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3406. If the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: No), the process proceeds to step S3407. To do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes the game setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays the setting item selection screen that is set to ON in the setting item selection screen transition process such as step S3707 of the game setting process of FIG. 59 and step S3907 of the melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. 61 described later. It is determined whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 based on whether the flag is on. If the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3408. If the display screen is not the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: No), the process proceeds to step S3409. Move to.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes setting item selection processing and ends the game setting processing. The details of the setting item selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag that is set to ON in the melody pattern setting screen transition process of step S3807 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60 described later is ON. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3410. If the display screen is not the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: No), the process proceeds to step S3411. Move to.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 executes the melody pattern setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The melody pattern setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64(A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting screen display flag which is set to ON in the music list display setting screen transition process of step S3809 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60 described later is ON. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98. When the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3412, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music list display setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting screen display flag that is set to ON in the music selection button effect setting screen transition process of step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60 described later is ON. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99. When the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3414, and when the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54(C) and FIG. 56). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69 described later, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71 described later, and the music selection button effect setting history of FIG. 73 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 is determined based on whether or not the setting history selection screen display flag that is set to ON in the setting history selection screen transition processing of step S4507 in the screen processing is ON. to decide. If the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3416. If the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the process proceeds to step S3417. Move to.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes the setting history selection process and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting history selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag that is set to ON in the melody pattern setting history screen transition processing in step S4207 in the setting history selection processing in FIG. 68 described later is ON. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3418. When the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes the melody pattern setting history screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting history screen display flag that is set to ON in the music list display history screen transition process of step S4209 in the setting history selection process of FIG. 68 described later is ON. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88. When the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3420, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No), The process moves to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting history screen processing and ends the game setting processing. The details of the music list display setting history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3421>
In step S3421, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag that is set to ON in the music selection button effect history screen transition process of step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. 68 described later is ON. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. If the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3422, and if the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No), The process moves to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect history screen processing, and ends the game setting processing. Details of the music selection button effect history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the MPU 51 displays a fluctuation stop screen 92, a top menu screen 93, a game setting screen 94, a setting item selection screen 95, a setting history selection screen 96, a melody pattern setting screen 97, a music list display setting screen 98, and a song selection. If none of the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, and the song selection button effect setting history screen 89, other processing corresponding to the current display screen is executed to set the game. The process ends.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process (step S3402 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the game start standby process, the display screen changes from the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53(A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)) in accordance with the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. ) Is executed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 on the symbol display unit 341 has started. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol is started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3501: Yes), it ends the game start standby process, and determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3501: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), it shifts the processing to step S3503, and when it determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. The waiting process ends.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the clock counter and refers to the value of the clock counter to change the fluctuation stop screen 92. You can grasp the time since was displayed.

When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3504, and when the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3503: No), the game start standby process. To finish.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), the player operates the operation button 20. Accordingly, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen processing (step S3404 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the top menu screen processing, from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)), the items selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 are changed. The process of shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3602, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3601: No). The process moves to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (step S3602), and the top menu screen process is ended.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the upper operation based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3603: No), the process proceeds. To step S3605.

<Step S3604>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 changes the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). Is executed (step S3604). For example, the MPU 51 selects the cursor image 936 when the up selection button 211 is operated while the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” shown in FIGS. 53B and 54D is temporarily selected. It is moved to the side of the selected image 932, which is one above 933. At this time, the selection image indicating that the temporary selection display is performed is changed from the selection image 933 to the selection image 932. On the other hand, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 936 to the side of the selection image 934, which is one lower than the selection image 933, when the down selection button 212 is operated in the state where the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is provisionally selected. The selected image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934. When the process of step S3604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

When the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D), the MPU 51 does not operate the cursor image 936 or the cursor image 936 even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated. Processing such as moving the temporary selection display of the selected images 941 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated by the player, based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F).

When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S3605: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3606 and determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3605: No), Finish the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 935 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)) of “End” on the top menu screen 93 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. To do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3607 and determines that the “end” selection image 935 has not been selected (step S3606: YES). S3606: No), and moves the process to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
When the MPU 51 determines that the “End” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) to the fluctuation stop screen 92 ( The fluctuation stop screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 53A) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF and sets the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and ends the top menu screen process.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 933 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)) of “customize game settings” on the top menu screen 93 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. To judge. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “game setting customization” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3608: YES), the process proceeds to step S3609, and it is determined that the “game setting customization” selection image 935 has not been selected. If so (step S3608: NO), the process proceeds to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
When it is determined that the selection image 935 of “Customize game setting” is selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)) to the game setting screen. The game setting screen shift processing for shifting to 94 (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 54(A)) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF and sets the game setting screen display flag to ON, and finishes the top menu screen process.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, the MPU 51 shifts to the display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player if the item selected by the player's operation of the determination button 21B is other than “end” and “customize game setting”. .. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process (step S3406 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the game setting screen processing, in response to an operation on the selection determining unit 21 by the player, from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54(A)) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54(B)), the setting history selection A process of shifting the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 54D) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3702, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3701: No). The process moves to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3701: YES), the game setting screen display flag is set to OFF (step S3702), and the game setting screen process is ended.

<Step S3703>
In step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the upper operation based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3704, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3703: No), the process. To step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. Accordingly, the temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display up or down by one on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the process of step S3704 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S3705: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3706, and when it is determined that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S3705: No), The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 943 (see FIG. 54(A)) of “normal music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "normal song selection setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the “normal song selection setting” selection image 943 has been selected (step S3706: YES), the process proceeds to step S3707 and determines that the “normal song selection setting” selection image 943 has not been selected. If so (step S3706: NO), the process proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
When it is determined that the selection image 943 of “normal song selection setting” is selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 54(A)). A setting item selection screen shift process for shifting to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 944 (see FIG. 54(A)) of “setting history song selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “setting history music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of “setting history song selection setting” is selected (step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3709, and the selection image 944 of “setting history song selection setting” is not selected. When it is determined (step S3708: NO), the process proceeds to step S3710.

<Step S3709>
When it is determined that the selection image 944 of “setting history song selection setting” is selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 54(A)). A setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 of “return to top menu” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 945 has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3711, and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 945 has not been selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
When it is determined that the selection image 945 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 54(A)) to the top menu screen. The top menu screen shift processing for shifting to 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 is selected by the player if the items selected by the player's operation of the determination button 21B are other than "normal song selection setting", "setting history song selection setting" and "return to top menu". Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Setting item selection process]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection processing (step S3408 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 55, in the setting item selection process, depending on the item selected by the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21, from the song selection related items at the time of the big hit game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95. A process of shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 is executed. In the following, the setting item selection process will be described by taking as an example the case where the music selection related items are three of a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83) and the music selection button effect. For example, instead of a part or all of the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83) and the music selection button effect, it is possible to allow the player to set other music selection related items. For example, as another music selection related item, initial temporary selected music or fixed initial temporary selected music that fixes the selected music by setting by the player can be considered.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3801: No). The process moves to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the variation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF (step S3802) and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects an upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). It is determined whether 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3803: YES), the process proceeds to step S3804, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3803: No), the process proceeds. To step S3805.

<Step S3804>
If it is determined that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button, as in the temporary selection display change process of step S3604 in the top menu screen process of FIG. Depending on which one of the 211 and the lower selection button 212, the temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display up or down by one on the setting item selection screen 95 is executed (step S3804). When the process of step S3804 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S3805: YES), the process proceeds to step S3806, and when it is determined that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S3805: NO), The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 951 (see FIG. 55) of “melody pattern setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “melody pattern setting” selection image 951 has been selected (step S3806: YES), the process proceeds to step S3807, and it is determined that the “melody pattern setting” selection image 951 has not been selected. If so (step S3806: NO), the process moves to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
When it is determined that the selection image 951 of “melody pattern setting” is selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97, as shown in FIG. 55. A melody pattern setting screen transition process is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 952 (see FIG. 55) of “music list display setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “music list display setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 952 of “song list display setting” is selected (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809, and the selection image 952 of “song list display setting” is not selected. When it is determined (step S3808: NO), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Step S3809>
When it is determined that the selection image 952 of “Music list display setting” is selected (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98, as illustrated in FIG. 55. A music list display setting screen transfer process to be transferred is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection screen process.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 953 (see FIG. 55) of “music selection button effect setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 953 of “music selection button effect setting” has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selection image 953 of “music selection button effect setting” is not selected. If it is determined (step S3810: NO), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Step S3811>
When it is determined that the selection image 953 of “Music selection button effect setting” is selected (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99, as illustrated in FIG. 55. A music selection button effect setting screen transition process to be performed is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection screen process.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 954 (see FIG. 55) of “back one” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the item "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 954 has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3813 and determines that the “back one” selection image 954 is not selected. If so (step S3812: NO), the process proceeds to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
When it is determined that the selection image 954 of "back one" is selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. 55 ( Step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the game setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3814>
When the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "melody pattern setting", "music list display setting", "music selection button effect setting", and "back one", the MPU 51 displays "top menu". Since it can be determined that "Return" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 55, top menu screen transfer processing for transferring the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process (step S3410 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting screen process, a process of setting the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game and the melody pattern (music output start) of the selected music is executed. Further, FIG. 62 shows an example of the melody pattern setting screen 97. In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 62, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

As shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting tentatively selected songs in the jackpot game, and melody patterns (output start portions) of unselected songs and already selected songs as selected songs. .. The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes a temporarily selected music setting image 971, an unselected music setting image 972, an already selected music setting image 973, selection images 974 to 976, and a selection determination unit image 977.

The temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. That is, the temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing portion or chorus portion when the player selects the temporarily selected music. It has a singing start selection image that sets what is to be done from the beginning part and a chorus selection image that is set to start outputting from the chorus part.

The unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is an unselected music. That is, the unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the player selects the unselected music from the singing portion or the chorus portion. It has a singing start selection image that sets what is to be done from the beginning part and a chorus selection image that is set to start outputting from the chorus part.

The selected music set image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is a selected music. That is, the already-selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the player selects the already-selected music from the singing portion, the chorus, or the portion. It has a singing selection image that sets what is to be done from the singing portion, and a chorus selection image that is to set that output is started from the chorus portion.

The plurality of selection images 974 to 976 are "return by one" selection images 974 that are selected when the display screen is returned by one and moved to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55). A selection image 975 of “return to top menu” selected when the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D), and temporarily selected music, unselected music, and already selected music The selection image 976 of "Random" that causes the gaming machine 10 to set the output start of is included. In the present embodiment, when the "Omakase" selection image 976 is selected to perform the automatic setting, the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music are all set to default.

The selection determining unit image 977 is an image imitating the selection determining unit 21, and is an image showing that a desired item from a plurality of items can be selected by operating the selection determining unit 21. In the selection determination part image 977, the characters “select” are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 are displayed. The corresponding image is highlighted. Further, the images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be highlighted by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determination part image 977, the character "decision" is attached to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that the operation should be performed when the temporarily selected item is selected.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 61, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S3901: No). The process moves to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF (step S3902), and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and if the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3903: No), the process proceeds. To step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 makes a temporary selection on the melody pattern setting screen 97 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. A temporary selection display change process of moving the display one by one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S3904 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S3905: YES), the process proceeds to step S3906, and when the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S3905: NO), The melody pattern setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “one step back” selection image 974 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S3906: NO), the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: YES), the MPU 51 switches the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B). ) And refer to FIG. 55) is executed (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 62) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 has been selected (step S3908: YES), the process proceeds to step S3909, and it is determined that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S3908: NO), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 “Return to top menu” is selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B) and The top menu screen shift processing for shifting to FIG. 54D) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 62) of “Random” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S3910: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3911, and determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S3910: YES). (S3910: No), the process proceeds to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
When it is determined that the “auto-selected” selection image 976 is selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece and the already selected music piece as default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is melody pattern 2 which starts output from the chorus part for the temporarily selected music, and output starts from the singing part (A melody part) for the already selected music as the selected music. The melody pattern 1 and the unselected music as the selected music are the melody pattern 2 in which the output starts from the hook portion (see FIG. 38).

<Step S3912>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S3910: No), that is, the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is "return one", "return to the top menu", or "automatic". If the operation for the item is also not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the setting temporarily selected in the temporarily selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 62, the tentatively selected song has melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion, and the unselected song as the selected song is sung. The melody pattern 1 is set to start output from the output portion (A melody portion), and the already selected song as the selected song is set to melody pattern 2 to start output from the chorus portion. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting contents and setting time of the melody pattern in the RAM 512. This makes it possible to display the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69 described later.

Thus, in step S3912, the player selects and determines the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, and the setting of the melody patterns (output start portion) of the unselected music and the already selected music as the selected music. This can be done by operating the part 21. Therefore, the player can select whether to listen to the temporarily selected music piece and the selected music piece from the beginning or to listen to the chorus portion with the highest excitement according to his/her preference. As a result, it becomes easy to determine whether the temporarily selected music is a music that the user prefers, and it is possible to enjoy the selected music according to his or her preference in both cases of unselected music and already selected music.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting flag to ON for the item set to the melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag for the temporarily selected music, an unselected music melody pattern setting flag for the unselected music, and an already selected music melody pattern setting flag for the already selected music. For example, when the enter operation on the enter button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 62, the unselected song melody pattern setting flag and the unselected song and the selected song set to the melody pattern different from the default setting are set. The already selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece and the already selected music piece are set, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

[Song list display setting screen processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process (step S3412 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music list display setting screen processing, a non-selected music image 834 for a disliked music (non-selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game and a selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for a favorite music (selected music) are displayed. Processing for performing display setting regarding the presence or absence (display mode) of is performed. 64(A) shows an example of the music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 64(B), 65(A) and 65(B) show an example of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. .. In the following, the display modes of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 64(A) is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. .. The music list display setting screen 98 includes selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977 as well as the melody pattern setting screen 97, in addition to the disliked music selection image 981 and the favorite music selection image 982. The selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination part image 977 are similar to those in the case of the melody pattern setting screen 97, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Also in the following, if the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 on the melody pattern setting screen 97 are similar, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The disliked music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. This disliked music selection image 981 is a display selection image selected when setting to display the non-selected music image 834, and a non-display selection image selected when performing setting to hide the non-selected music image 834. Have. In the present embodiment, "to hide the non-selected music image 834" means that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed, but the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that they are displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the music selected image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 64(B).

It should be noted that it may be considered as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the non-selected music which is not selected by the player even though the music was previously selected as the initial provisionally selected music is erroneously selected. It is possible to avoid making a selection.

The favorite music selection image 982 is an image for setting whether or not to display the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selection music (already selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The favorite song selection image 982 is a display selection image selected when performing the setting to display the already-selected song image 831 and a non-display selection image selected when performing the setting to hide the already-selected song image 831. Have. In the present embodiment, “to hide the selected music image 831” does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not displayed, but the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that they are displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting is made such that the already selected music image 831 is not displayed, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 65(A).

It should be noted that it may be considered as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not displayed when the setting is made to hide the selected music image 831. According to such another embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is set to be hidden, it is possible to avoid repeatedly selecting the already-selected music previously selected by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65B, when both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are set to be hidden, the music selection images 83 other than the temporarily selected music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. It

<Step S4001>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 in the symbol display unit 341 is started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S4001: No). The process moves to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4004, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4003: No), the process proceeds. To step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 temporarily sets the music list display setting screen 98 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. Temporary selection display change processing for moving the selection display to one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S4004 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and when it is determined that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4005: No), The music list display setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 64(A)) of “Go Back One” on the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. .. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4006: YES), the process proceeds to step S4007 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is not selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process proceeds to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of “back one” is selected (step S4006: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the setting item selection screen 95 ( A setting item selection screen shift process for shifting to FIG. 54(B) and FIG. 55) is executed (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the song list display setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the song list display setting screen process.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 64A) of “Return to top menu” on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. .. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is selected (step S4008: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4009, and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is not selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process proceeds to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53). (B) and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 64A) of “Random” on the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and when the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4010: Yes). (S4010: No), the process proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the unselected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the selected music (non-selected music) that the user dislikes on the music selection image display screen 82. And the display setting of the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to the default (step S4011). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4012>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is not selected (step S4010: No), that is, the operation of the enter button 21B by the player is “one step back”, “return to the top menu”, or “automatic”. If it does not correspond to the operation for the item, the MPU 51 selects the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image in the settings temporarily selected for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and the favorite selected music (already selected music). The display setting of 831 (see FIG. 25) is made (step S4012). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 64A, the non-selected music image 834 is displayed and the already-selected music image 831 is set to non-display. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the music selection image 83 in the RAM 512. This allows the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to be displayed in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71 described later.

In this way, in step S4012, the already-selected music image 831 and the non-selected music (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 can be set to be displayed or hidden, and therefore, in a display mode according to the player's preference. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 of the display mode set by himself/herself. In addition, the player performs the non-display setting of the selected music image 831 so that the music selection image 83 includes the selected music image 831 corresponding to the selected music selected by the previous player in the past. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, the player performs the non-display setting of the non-selected music image 834 so that the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music that the previous player has not selected in the past is included in the music selection image 83, for example. In such a case, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selected music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs a non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the non-display setting flag is set to ON for the item set to "non-display" different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flag includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and a selected music image non-display set flag for the favorite selected music (already selected music). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 64A, the favorite selected song (selected song) set to the display setting different from the default setting is not selected as the selected song image. The display setting flag is set to on.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64(A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). Execute. That is, when the display settings of the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting screen process.

[Music selection button effect setting screen processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process (step S3414 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting screen processing, processing for performing settings relating to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a music piece in the jackpot game is executed. 67 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99. In the following, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 67, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen for performing settings relating to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a music piece in the jackpot game. The music selection button effect setting screen 99 has selection images 974 to 976 and selection similar to the melody pattern setting screen 97, in addition to the expectation suggestion effect effect setting image 991, the probability variation confirmation effect effect setting image 992, and the holding holiday condominium effect effect setting image 993. The determination part image 977 is included.

The expectation suggesting effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the expectation suggesting effect when selecting a song in the jackpot game. The expectation suggesting effect setting image 991 includes an execution selection image (an image of “execute”) for setting execution of the expectation suggesting effect, and a non-execution selection image for setting not executing the expectation suggesting effect ( “Do not execute” image). The expectation suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the suggestive effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond.

The probability variation finalization effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the probability variation finalization effect when a song is selected in the jackpot game. This probability variation fixed effect setting image 992 is an execution selection image (an image of “execute”) for setting execution of the probability variation fixed effect, and a non-execution selection image for setting not to execute the probability variation fixed effect (“do not execute”). Image). The probability variation final effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the final effect 1 and the final effect 3 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond.

The pending holiday game finalization effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the pending holiday game finalization effect at the time of selecting a music piece in the jackpot game. The hold condominium confirmation effect setting image 993 is an execution selection image for setting execution of the reservation condominium confirmation effect (an image of “execute”), and a non-execution setting for not executing the reservation condominium confirmation effect. It has a selected image (an image of “not executed”). It should be noted that the hold-up condominium confirmation effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the hold-up condominium is performed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the confirmation effect 2 and the confirmation effect 4 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond.

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 66, in step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 in the symbol display unit 341 is started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4102, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S4101: No). The process moves to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4102), and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
In step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4103: YES), the process proceeds to step S4104, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4103: No), the process. To step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 temporarily sets the music selection button effect setting screen 99 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. Temporary selection display change processing for moving the selection display to one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S4104 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4105: YES), the process proceeds to step S4106, and when it is determined that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4105: No), The music selection button effect setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 67) of “Go Back One” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is selected (step S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4107 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is not selected. If so (step S4106: NO), the process proceeds to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4106: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. B) and the setting item selection screen shift processing for shifting to FIG. 55) are executed (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 67) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4109 and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is not selected. If so (step S4108: NO), the process proceeds to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to (D) in FIG. 54 (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 67) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “auto-selected” selection image 976 has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4111 and when the “auto-selected” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4110). S4110: No), and moves the process to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
When it is determined that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect regarding the presence/absence of execution of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the suspended condominium confirmation effect as the music selection button effect. The setting is set to the default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the holding holiday confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is "back one", "return to the top menu", or "Random". When it does not correspond to the operation for the item, the MPU 51 sets the effect execution setting regarding whether or not to execute the expectation suggesting effect, the probability variation confirming effect, and the suspended condominium confirming effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4112). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 67, the expectation suggestive effect is executed, the probability variation confirming effect is executed, and the suspended holiday consolidating effect is set to non-execution. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the music selection button effect in the RAM 512. As a result, it becomes possible to display the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. 73 described later.

As described above, in step S4112, execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be individually set for the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the holding condominium confirmation effect, so that the music selection button effect is executed according to the player's preference. Can be made. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the jackpot game in a manner that suits him.

Specifically, the player sets the expectation of the 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state by, for example, performing a determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song by setting the expectation degree suggesting effect to execution. You can enjoy it as an act to confirm. On the other hand, by setting the anticipation suggestion effect to non-execution, the anticipation degree suggestion effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed. You can enjoy the jackpot game with the expectation that it is in the game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state.

In addition, the player, by setting the probability variation finalization effect to execution, confirms whether or not the determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song is the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, for example. Can be enjoyed as an act for. On the other hand, by setting the probability variation final production to non-execution, the probability variation final production is not executed even if the determination operation is performed, so the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state does not have to worry about whether the probability variation final production is executed. Or, you can enjoy the jackpot game with the expectation that it is in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the player enjoys the operation of confirming the decision button 21B for selecting a music, for example, by confirming whether or not the holding holiday complex is generated by setting the holding holiday game finalization effect to be executed. be able to. On the other hand, by setting the suspended holiday confirmation effect to non-execution, the retained holiday confirmation effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed, so that it is possible to perform the retained holiday confirmation effect without being overjoyed. , Hold game can be enjoyed with the expectation that a hold holiday will occur.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs effect non-execution setting flag setting processing according to the player setting. Specifically, the music selection button effect flag is set to ON for the item set to "not execute" different from the default setting. Here, the production non-execution setting flag includes an expectation suggestive production non-execution setting flag, a probability variation fixed production non-execution setting flag, and a holding profit consecutive resort fixed production non-execution setting flag. For example, when the determination operation on the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 67, the pending holiday home finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the pending holiday home finalization effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when the setting regarding whether or not to execute the music selection button effect is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music list music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting screen process.

[Setting history selection process]
Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection processing (step S3416 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 56, in the setting history selection processing, the player selects and determines the selection determining unit 21 from the song selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C and FIG. 56 ). A process of shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 and the like is executed according to the item selected by the operation (see FIG. 56). In the following, as the setting history selection process, similar to the setting item selection process described with reference to FIG. 60, there are three music selection related items: a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect. Although a case will be described as an example, the music selection related items can be changed in the same manner as the setting item selection process.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4202, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S4201: No). , And the process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF (step S4202) and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the upper operation based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4203: No), the process. To step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. Accordingly, the temporary selection display changing process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display up or down by one on the setting history selection screen 96 is executed. When the process of step S4204 ends, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4205: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4206 and determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4205: No). The setting history selection process ends.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 961 (see FIG. 56) of “melody pattern setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting history”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “melody pattern setting history” selection image 961 has been selected (step S4206: YES), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the “melody pattern setting history” selection image 961 is not selected. If it is determined that it is (step S4206: NO), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
When it is determined that the selection image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” is selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54C and 56) to set the melody pattern. A melody pattern setting history screen shift process for shifting to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 962 (see FIG. 56) of “music list display setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “music list display setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “music list display setting history” selection image 962 has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4209, and the “music list display setting history” selection image 962 is selected. If not determined (step S4208: NO), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
When it is determined that the selection image 962 of “music list display setting history” is selected (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen. The music list display setting history screen shift processing to shift to 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 56) of the “music selection button effect setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it is not (step S4210: No), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
When it is determined that the selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is selected (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen as shown in FIG. The process proceeds to 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to OFF while setting the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 964 (see FIG. 56) of “Go Back One” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 964 is selected (step S4212: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4213 and determines that the “back one” selection image 964 is not selected. If so (step S4212: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
When it is determined that the "back one" selection image 964 is selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. 56 ( Step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to ON while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
When the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "melody pattern setting history", "music list display setting history", "music selection button effect setting history", and "back one", Since it can be determined that “return to top menu” has been selected, as shown in FIG. 56, top menu screen transfer processing for transferring the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen process (step S3418 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting history screen processing, processing relating to the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 and the melody pattern (music output start) of the selected music output in the jackpot game is performed based on the setting history. Further, FIG. 70 shows an example of the melody pattern setting history screen 87. In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will be described first with reference to FIG. 70, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 70 is for setting the temporarily selected music in the jackpot game, and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected music and the already selected music as the selected music based on the setting history. Is the screen of. The melody pattern setting history screen 87 includes a setting history display image 871 for displaying the melody pattern settings of the temporarily selected song, the unselected song, and the already selected song a plurality of times, a history selection image 872, selection images 974 to 976, and a selection determination unit. Image 977 is included.

The setting history display image 871 shows history records 1 to 3 relating to the setting of the melody pattern for three times including the current melody pattern setting. Each of the melody pattern setting histories 1 to 3 includes information about the set time and information about past settings of the melody patterns (output start portions) of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece and the already selected music piece.

The history selection image 872 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece in the setting content of the history record 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting content of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece in the setting content of the history record 3. Further, the history 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed according to the operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed. In association with the changes of 3 to 3, the temporarily selected histories 1 to 3 in the setting history display image 871 change.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 69, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 in the symbol display unit 341 is started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S4301: No). The process moves to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF (step S4302) and ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4304, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4303: No), the process proceeds. To step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the melody pattern setting history screen 87 on the melody pattern setting history screen 87 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. Temporary selection display change processing for moving the selection display to one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S4304 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines, based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F), whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by the player. When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4305: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4306 and determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4305: NO), The melody pattern setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 70) of “Go Back One” on the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4307 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is not selected. If so (step S4306: NO), the process proceeds to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4306: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON while setting the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 70) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is selected (step S4308: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4309, and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is not selected. If so (step S4308: NO), the process proceeds to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to (D) in FIG. 54 (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 70) of “Random” on the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4310: Yes). (S4310: No), the process proceeds to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
When it is determined that the “auto-selected” selection image 976 is selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music piece, the unselected music piece and the already selected music piece as default (step S4311). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is melody pattern 1 that starts output from the chorus part for the temporarily selected song, melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus part for the unselected song, and sing for the already selected song. This is the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) (see FIG. 38).

<Step S4312>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4310: No), the player's operation of the determination button 21B is one of "return one", "return to the top menu", and "automatic". When the operation does not correspond to the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the melody pattern is set to the same setting as the history 2. That is, for the temporarily selected music, the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the singing portion (A melody part), for the unselected music, melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus part, and for the already selected music from the chorus part Is set to the melody pattern 2 which starts the output of.

As described above, in step S4312, the melody pattern setting history screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music and the melody patterns (output start portion) of the unselected music and the already selected music as the selected music are set. Since it can be performed by the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21 based on 87, it is possible to enjoy the same effect as in the case of setting the melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 that shifts from the setting item selection screen 95. In addition, since the setting of the temporarily selected music and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music can be selected from the setting history, the melody pattern can be set to the same contents as the past settings by a simple operation on the selection determining unit 21. You can Therefore, the player can set a desired melody pattern in accordance with the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 when the player wants to return to the previous setting.

<Step S4313>
In step S4313, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the item set to the melody pattern different from the default setting. For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the temporarily selected music set to the melody pattern different from the default setting. It

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when the melody patterns of the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 25) are set, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. Move to 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

[Music list display setting history screen processing]
71 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen process (step S3420 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music list display setting history screen processing, the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked music (non-selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) are displayed. A process of performing display setting regarding presence/absence of display (display mode) based on the setting history is executed. Further, FIG. 72 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88. In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will be described first with reference to FIG. 72, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

The music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 72 is for setting the presence or absence (display mode) of displaying the music selection image 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. It is a screen. The music list display setting history screen 88 displays a setting history display image 881, a history selection image 882, and a selection image other than the settings history display image 881 and the history selection image 882, each of which displays the setting of whether or not to display the disliked music (non-selected music) and the favorite music (selected music). 974-976 and the selection decision part image 977 are included.

The setting history display image 881 shows history 1 to 3 regarding the setting for three times including the setting of the presence/absence of the display of the current non-selected music and the selected music. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information regarding the set time and information regarding whether or not the unselected music and the already selected music are displayed.

The history selection image 882 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is used to set the presence/absence of display of unselected music and already selected music in the setting content of history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the presence/absence of display of non-selected music and already-selected music in the setting content of history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the presence or absence of display of non-selected music and already-selected music in the setting content of history 3. Further, the history 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed according to the operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed. In synchronism with the changes of 3 to 3, the temporarily selected histories 1 to 3 in the setting history display image 881 change.

<Step S4401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 71, in step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 in the symbol display unit 341 is started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4402, and when it is determined that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). , The process proceeds to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF (step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4403>
In step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4404, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4403: No), the process. To step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the music list display setting history screen depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. Temporary selection display change processing for moving the selection display to one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S4404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4405: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4406 and determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4405: No). The music list display setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) of “Go Back One” on the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: YES), the process proceeds to step S4407 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4406: NO), the process proceeds to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4406: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54). (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 72) of “Return to top menu” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is selected (step S4408: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4409 and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is not selected. If so (step S4408: NO), the process proceeds to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
When determining that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B ) And FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 72) of “Random” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4411, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4410: Yes). S4410: No), and moves the process to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
When it is determined that the “auto-selected” selection image 976 is selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the unselected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. And the display setting of the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to the default (step S4411). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4412>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4410: No), that is, the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is "back one", "return to the top menu", or "Random". If the operation for the item is also not applicable, the MPU 51 performs display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) in the setting history setting temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 (see FIG. 25). Step S4412). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 72, the same setting as the history 1 is set. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the already-selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to be displayed.

As described above, in step S4412, the display setting of the selected song (favorite song) image 831 and the non-selected song (dislike song) image 834 included in the song selection image 83 is displayed or hidden on the song list display setting history screen 88. Since it can be performed by the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21 based on this, the same effect as in the case where the display setting is performed according to the music list display setting screen 98 that is moved from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, since the display settings of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 can be selected from the setting history, the same setting contents as the past setting contents can be obtained by a simple operation on the selection determining unit 21. The display can be set. Therefore, the player can perform desired display settings according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 when returning to the previous settings.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs a music image non-display setting flag setting process in accordance with the player setting. Specifically, the music image non-display setting flag is set to ON for the item set to "non-display" different from the default setting. For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 72, the setting is the same as the default setting, so the non-selected music image non-display setting flag and the already selected music image non-display setting flag are set. Neither is set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). .. That is, when the display settings of the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

[Music selection button performance setting history screen processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen processing (step S3422 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting history screen processing, processing for performing effect execution settings related to the music selection button effect executed at the time of music selection in the jackpot game is executed based on the setting history. Further, FIG. 74 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. In the following, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the music selection button effect setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 74 is a screen for performing settings related to effects executed when selecting a song in the jackpot game, based on the setting history. The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image for individually displaying, for each effect, a plurality of settings for whether or not to execute the music selection button effect including the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the suspended holiday confirmation effect. 891, a history selection image 892, selection images 974 to 976, and a selection determination unit image 977 are included.

The setting history display image 891 shows the history 1 to 3 regarding the setting for three times including the setting regarding whether or not the current music selection button effect is executed. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information regarding the set time and information regarding the setting regarding whether or not each music selection button effect is executed.

The history selection image 892 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting content of the music selection button effect of history 3. Further, the history 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed according to the operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed. The history records 1 to 3 that are temporarily selected in the setting history display image 891 change in association with the changes of 3 to 3.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started in the symbol display unit 341, based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4502, and when it is determined that the change of the main symbol 921 is not started (step S4501: No). The process moves to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the change of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF (step S4502), and ends the music selection button effect setting history screen processing.

<Step S4503>
In step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 uses the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operations. Whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4504, and when the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S4503: No), the process. To step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 causes the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 to be displayed depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. A temporary selection display change process for moving the temporary selection display to one in the up, down, left or right direction is executed. When the process of step S4504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S4505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4506, and when the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S4505: No), The music selection button effect setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of “Go Back One” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return one item". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is selected (step S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4507 and determines that the “back one” selection image 974 is not selected. If so (step S4506: NO), the process proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
When it is determined that the selection image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54). Setting history selection screen shift processing (step S4507) for shifting to (C) and FIG. 56). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is selected (step S4508: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4509, and determines that the “return to top menu” selection image 975 is not selected. If so (step S4508: NO), the process proceeds to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 "Return to top menu" is selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B). ) And FIG. 54D)) is executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 74) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “Random”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “automatic” selection image 976 is selected (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, and when the “automatic” selection image 976 is not selected (step S4510: Yes). S4510: No), and moves the process to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
When it is determined that the "automatic" selection image 976 is selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an effect regarding whether or not to execute the expectation suggesting effect, the probability variation confirming effect, and the suspended condominium confirming effect as the music selection button effect. The setting is set to the default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the holding holiday confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the operation of the enter button 21B by the player is "back one", "return to the top menu", or "Random". When it does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 sets the game setting relating to the presence/absence of the execution of the expectation suggesting effect, the probability variation confirming effect, and the suspended condominium confirming effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4512). For example, when the enter operation is performed on the enter button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 74, the same setting as the history 3 is set. Specifically, none of the expectation suggesting effect, the probability variation confirming effect, and the suspended holiday confirmation effect is set to non-execution.

As described above, in step S4512, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be performed by the player operating the selection determining unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. Therefore, from the setting item selection screen 95 It is possible to enjoy the same effect as in the case where the effect execution setting is performed in accordance with the transitional music selection button effect setting screen 99. In addition, since the effect execution setting of the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, it is possible to set the effect execution setting of the same content as the past setting content by a simple operation on the selection determining unit 21. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, he/she can perform desired effect execution settings based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs effect non-execution setting flag setting processing in accordance with the player setting. Specifically, the effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the item set to "not execute" different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation on the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 74, regarding the expectation suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the reserved profit condominium confirmation effect that are different from the default setting, the effect execution suggestion effect, All of the degree-of-expectation suggestive effect non-execution setting flag, the probability variation finalization effect non-execution setting flag, and the reserved profit condominium finalization effect non-execution setting flag are turned on.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B) and FIG. 54(D)). That is, when the effect execution setting for the music selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the music list music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the music list display setting screen process.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player operates the selection determining unit 21 to display the temporarily selected music image 832 that enables selection of the music included in the already selected music. It can be displayed, and by performing a determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 in this state, it is possible to select a previously selected song. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected already selected music with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the already selected selected music from the speaker 26. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

In addition, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the temporarily selected music image 832 by operating the selection determining unit 21, and in this state, the selection operation is performed on the selection determining unit 21 to select the previously selected music image 832. Unselected music that has never been played can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 and output the unselected music from the speaker 26. As a result, the player can select not only the selected song and the unselected song but also select the selected song or the unselected song with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21. A desired music piece can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26.

Further, when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporary selection music image 832 is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can secure the opportunity to convey.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and steps similar to various processing procedures will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments below may be selected and combined arbitrarily.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the default setting, the output start of the temporarily selected music is the chorus part of both the selected music and the unselected music, and the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (singing part) in the already selected music. ), the case where the unselected music is the chorus part is explained. That is, in the first embodiment, when the temporarily selected music is selected as the selected music, the case where the selected music is output again from the A melody part (song start part) or the chorus part has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the default setting, when the selected song (temporary selected song) is the already selected song, the selected song is selected from the continuation of the temporarily selected song output from the speaker 26 when the song is selected. This is different from the first embodiment in that the speaker 26 outputs the temporarily selected music continuously when the selected music is selected.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, it is general that the temporarily selected music is output from the hook portion to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the hook portion to increase the attention to the jackpot game. Is. In this case, when the music selection is performed, the temporarily selected music output at the temporary selection stage is interrupted once, and the chorus portion of the same music as the temporarily selected music is restarted at the stage of selecting the music. Therefore, the player will listen to the chorus portion of the same song in a short time.

However, if the selected song is a player's favorite already-selected song, this already-selected song is a previously-selected song. Therefore, by listening to the chorus portion of the same song in a short time, the already-selected song is selected. This can lead to the tendency to get tired of people. In addition, it is feared that the temporarily selected music is cut off midway, and the tension of the player, which is raised by listening to the chorus portion of the favorite music, may be suddenly lowered. Furthermore, since the output start of the selected music is the chorus part, in the jackpot game that executes the round game (opening/closing execution mode) about five times, the music start part of the already selected music which is the selected music (for example, the intro part or A You may not be able to listen to the melody part (singing part).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is output as the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing out part) and selected. When the music is the already selected music, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. That is, when the selected music is selected, it is output from the music start portion in the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage without interruption. Therefore, at least at the stage of tentative selection, it is possible to reliably listen to the song start portion of the already-selected song, and the chorus portion of the same song is output in duplicate in a short time from the stage of tentative selection to the stage of song selection. Since this is prevented, even when the selected music is repeatedly selected, it is possible to prevent early exhaustion of the selected music. Further, since the selected music is continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion to the chorus portion and maintain the tension high. The interest in jackpot games is improved.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in this embodiment, and FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process executed in this embodiment. Reference numeral 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in this embodiment. That is, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the already-selected music is selected. Differs from the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 75, the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, and the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77. Note that, in the temporarily selected music output processing shown in FIG. 76 and the selected music output processing shown in FIG. 77, the melody pattern setting of the temporarily selected music and the selected music is changed from the default setting by the player for simplification of description. When it is done, it is not considered. For example, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, the step corresponding to step S2703 in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40 in the first embodiment is omitted. Further, in the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77, steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the temporary selected music output process shown in FIG. 41 in the above-described first embodiment are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that when the already selected music is temporarily selected, all of the music A to the music T are the melody pattern 1, that is, A. It is set to start output from the melody (singing out portion), and when the unselected music pieces are provisionally selected, all of the music pieces A to T are set to start output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus portion. On the other hand, in the selected song, the default setting of the melody pattern is that when the already selected song is selected, all of the songs A to T are set to the continuation part of the temporarily selected song, that is, the output of the temporarily selected song is continued. When the selected song is selected, all of songs A to T are set to start output from melody pattern 1, that is, A melody (song portion). Here, the continuation of the output of the temporarily selected music means that the temporarily selected music is output without any interruption. However, the temporary operation of the temporarily selected music is momentarily performed because the operation sound is output at the moment the enter button 21B is operated. This also includes the case where the selected song is interrupted. In addition, in the embodiments other than the present embodiment, the case where the output of the temporarily selected music is continued is also synonymous with the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the temporarily selected music is different from that in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the temporarily selected music output processing of the present embodiment, the already selected music is temporarily selected. In the case of (step S2702: No), the melody pattern 1 which is the default setting is unconditionally selected (step S4601), and the temporarily selected music is output as the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing out part). (Step S2707).

As shown in FIG. 77, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the selected music is different from that in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the selected music output processing of the present embodiment, when the already selected music is provisionally selected. (Step S2801: No), the continuation of the output of the temporarily selected music which is the default setting is unconditionally selected (step S4701), and the temporary selection output from the speaker 26 at the time when the already selected music is selected as the selected music. The music is continuously output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the music (step S2811).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player selects the already-selected music, the already-selected music output from the music start portion as the temporarily selected music can be heard from the continuation of the portion output at the time of the determination operation. it can. That is, when selecting the already-selected music, the player can continuously listen to the already-selected music from the music start portion after the already-selected music is provisionally selected.

In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuation of the temporarily selected music) on the condition that the selected music (temporarily selected music) is already selected. When the selected song (temporarily selected song) is an unselected song, it is possible to output the selected song from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected song (continue the temporarily selected song). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the temporarily selected music is the A melody part (singing out part) in the already selected music and the chorus part in the unselected music, but the output when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music The start may be the chorus part, and the output start when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music may be the A melody part (singing out part). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (singing out part) in the unselected music, but the output start when the temporarily selected music is the unselected music is the chorus part. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, in the provisionally selected music output process and the selected music output process, the fact that the melody pattern is set by the player different from the default setting is not taken into consideration. Similarly, the provisionally selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set by the player different from the default setting.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the melody pattern is determined for the temporarily selected song and the selected song depending on whether these songs are already selected songs or unselected songs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the melody pattern is determined for the temporarily selected music and the selected music according to the jackpot type (to be exact, the number of rounds of the jackpot game).

In the present embodiment, for the temporarily selected music and the selected music, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (to be exact, the number of rounds of the jackpot game). Therefore, the melody pattern table, the temporarily selected music output process, and the selected music output The processing is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, in the default setting of the melody pattern of the initially selected music, in the 5R jackpot game (5R normal jackpot game and 5R probability variation jackpot game), all of the songs A to T are from the melody pattern 2, that is, the hook portion. In the 16R (probable variation) jackpot game, all the songs A to T in the 16R jackpot game are set to be the output start from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (singing out portion). On the other hand, in the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected song, in the 5R jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to the continuation of the temporarily selected song, that is, the output of the temporarily selected song is continued. All of T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, from the A melody portion (singing out portion). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of 5R jackpot (5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot), the temporarily selected song is output from the hook portion, and when the song is selected, the temporarily selected song is continuously output. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R jackpot, the temporarily selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part), and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part).

By the way, in a general gaming machine, as a big hit game, a plurality of big hit games having different advantages for the player are provided. In the present embodiment, 5R normal jackpots, 5R certainty variation jackpots, and 16R certainty variation jackpots, which have different advantages as described above, are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the tentatively selected song is output from the hook portion in order to effectively convey the goodness of the song, and the selected song is output from the hook portion to increase the attention to the jackpot game. It is common to

However, if the output start of both the temporarily selected song and the selected song is set to the hook portion, the temporarily selected song that was output at the stage of temporary selection is interrupted once, and the hook portion of the same song as the temporarily selected song is It will start again when the song is selected. Therefore, it is feared that the player may feel discomfort or dislike the chorus part of the same music being duplicated in a short time or the music being interrupted. Despite these concerns, the output of the temporarily selected song is stopped and the same song is again output as the selected song until the jackpot game where the number of rounds is about 16R and the game time is relatively long. I can't find the meaning of that.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, the temporarily selected music is continuously output when the music is selected. In this way, even in the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, the tentatively selected song can be continuously listened to as the temporarily selected song, and the temporarily selected song can be continuously output. The temporarily selected music that has been played is not interrupted once, and it is possible to avoid overlapping listening to the chorus portion of the same music in a short time. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not hear the chorus portion of the same music in a short time, and does not feel discomfort or disgust about the break in the music.

On the other hand, in the case of the 16R jackpot, which has a relatively long playing time, the temporarily selected song is output from the chorus part, and the selected song is output from the A melody part (singing out part). Therefore, with the 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same song in a short time. In addition, after enjoying the chorus part as the temporarily selected music, it is possible to listen to the song as the newly selected music from the beginning of the music. As a result, the player can enjoy the 16R jackpot game, which has a relatively long playing time, from the start of singing the selected song. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort or dislike of the break in the music.

Here, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process executed in this embodiment, and FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in this embodiment. is there. Note that, in the temporarily selected music output processing shown in FIG. 79 and the selected music output processing shown in FIG. 80, the melody pattern setting of the temporarily selected music and the selected music is changed from the default setting by the player for simplification of description. When it is done, it is not considered.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the present embodiment, since the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music (see FIG. 78 ), the provisional embodiment of the present embodiment is performed. In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether the 16R jackpot is a big hit. Further, the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music is determined according to the determination result in step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the temporarily selected music is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: YES), it is determined whether or not it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801). If it is not the 16R jackpot (step S4801: No), that is, if it is the 5R jackpot, melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the temporarily selected music piece is the A melody portion (singing portion) Is output (step S4803). On the other hand, if it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801: YES), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the temporarily selected music piece is output from the hook portion (step S4904).

If the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), the melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and the temporarily selected music piece is output with the melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

Here, in order to randomly select the melody pattern, the promotion flag is set to ON (step S2701: YES), but the promotion effect flag is not set to ON in the case of 16R jackpot. .. Therefore, since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is a big hit when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, by randomly selecting the melody pattern in step S4806, the 5R satisfying the predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702). Regarding the jackpot, the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music may be inconsistent.

When the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, when the melody pattern 1 is selected, the temporarily selected song A is the same as the default setting of the 5R jackpot according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot. The data is output from the melody part (singing out part) (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: YES), the temporarily selected music piece is output from the hook portion different from the default setting for the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, and it is clearly indicated in advance that the promotion effect is executed before the promotion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, since the melody pattern of the selected song is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) (see FIG. 78), the selected song of the present embodiment. In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not it is a 5R jackpot. Specifically, when the selected song is an already selected song (step S2801: No), when it is the second and subsequent song decisions (step S2802: No), or when the promotion effect flag is set to off ( (Step S2803: No) It is determined whether or not it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901). If it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901: Yes), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, if it is not the 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, if it is the 16R jackpot, melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing out portion) ( Step S4903).

When the condition for receiving the contradiction output lottery is satisfied (Yes in all steps of steps S2801 to S2803), the contradiction output lottery is performed (step S2804), and when the contradiction output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the contradiction output lottery, it is a condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but at the time when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as described above. Since it can be determined that it is the 5R jackpot, if the contradiction output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

On the other hand, when the contradiction output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the selected song is output according to the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected song, and it is clearly indicated in advance that the promotion effect will be executed before the promotion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the default setting of the selected song in the case of the 5R jackpot is that the output of the temporarily selected song is continued, so that the song is the same both during the temporary selection of the song and after the selection of the song during a short game time. It is avoided that a part is output or that a music is output from a different part after selecting the music. As a result, in the case of a 5R jackpot, the music can be continuously listened to without exception unless the contradiction output lottery is won, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot gaming state where the game time is long, the player listens to the chorus portion of the temporarily selected song and then listens again to the selected song that is the same song as the temporarily selected song from the A melody portion (singing out portion). be able to. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot game state, it is possible to fully enjoy the selected music including the chorus part of the music from the A melody part (singing out part) because there is plenty of game time.

In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a more advantageous gaming state is executed, depending on whether or not there is a contradiction in the start of outputting music at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music. Thus, the operation of the selection button 21A of the selection determination unit 21 for temporarily selecting a music and the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting a music is not an action of simply temporarily selecting or selecting a music. It can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In the present embodiment, the selected song is output from the continuation of the temporarily selected song (continuation of the temporarily selected song) on condition that the 5R jackpot is hit. It is also possible to output the selected music from the continuation (continuation of the temporarily selected music). Of course, the selected song may be output from the continuation of the selected song (continuation of the temporarily selected song) in both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the temporarily selected music is the hook portion in the 5R jackpot, and the 16R jackpot (the singing portion). However, the output start of the temporarily selected song in the 5R jackpot is the A melody portion (the singing portion). ), the output of the 16R jackpot provisionally selected music may be started as the hook portion. Further, in the present embodiment, in the provisionally selected music output process and the selected music output process, the fact that the melody pattern is set by the player different from the default setting is not taken into consideration. Similarly, the provisionally selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set by the player different from the default setting.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the music selection button effect is provided on condition that the unselected music is selected in the first music determination. The case has been described in which the (expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability change confirming effect, and the suspended holiday confirmation effect) are executed (see FIG. 42).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, the music selection operation is performed on condition that a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed on the enter button 21B. A case where the button effect is executed will be described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a determination operation for selecting a music piece with respect to the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) has been performed by the player, the second determination operation pattern flag (FIG. 18(F)). ) Is set to ON (see step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39). That is, in the above-described first embodiment, by confirming that the operation on the enter button 21B (see FIG. 1) is started, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of determining the music on the enter button 21B. .. In this way, when it is determined that the player has operated the OK button 21B by starting the operation of the OK button 21B (see FIG. 1), is the music selection button effect executed at the moment when the OK button 21B is operated? Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the moment when the enter button 21B is operated as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous hit operation or the long press operation is performed on the decision button 21B. Therefore, unlike the above-described first embodiment, a continuous hit operation on the decision button 21B and a continuous hit operation on the decision button 21B can be performed while increasing the sense of expectation that the music selection button effect will be executed in a fixed time after the operation of the decision button 21B is started. You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in the present embodiment, as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed, the operation on the enter button 21B can be enjoyed in a manner different from that of the first embodiment.

Further, the player may be suggested or clarified in the symbol display portion 341 that the music selection button effect is executed by a continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation on the decision button 21B, but such suggestion or clarification is performed. By not having the display mode (for example, in the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), the continuous hitting operation and the long-pressing operation with respect to the decision button 21B can be enjoyed as a so-called back command for executing the music selection button effect.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between step S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect process of the first embodiment described above. After that, it is determined whether the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) (step S5101). Whether the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation is performed when the determination operation is performed is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F). For example, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, when it is determined that the operation of the enter button 21B is started by confirming the ON setting of the second enter operation pattern flag (step S2606: Yes), the constant It is possible to determine whether the continuous hitting operation has been performed on the enter button 21B by checking whether the second decision operation pattern flag is turned on or off a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Further, whether or not the long press operation is performed depending on whether the duration time during which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON has reached a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds) set within the predetermined time. Can judge.

Then, when the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation is performed within a certain period after the determination operation (step S5101: Yes), and when the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), the 5R certain variation selection button The effect determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R certainty variation selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906). ..

In the present embodiment, when a player selects an unselected music, the player performs a continuous hit operation or a long-press operation on the decision button 21B, whereby the music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the act of selecting a music as an act of confirming whether the music selection button effect is executed by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous pressing operation or the long-pressing operation on the enter button 21B is performed in response to the music determining operation. However, this condition and the first implementation described above are performed. The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the conditions in the form (operation of the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when the operation on the enter button 21B is started or when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed.

Further, in step S5101, it is determined whether either one of the continuous hitting operation and the long-pressing operation is performed, but only the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation on the OK button 21B is the determination target in step S5101. May be

Although it is determined in step S2901 whether or not an unselected music piece is selected, step S2901 may be omitted and the music selection button effect may be executed even when the already selected music piece is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as the music selection button effect process, unselected music is selected by operating the enter button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music determination. The case has been described in which the music selection button effect (expectation degree suggesting effect, probability variation confirming effect, and hold condominium confirming effect) is executed on the condition that it is performed (see FIG. 42 ). Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation on the enter button 21B (see FIG. 1) is triggered by the music determining operation. The case has been described in which the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the item is performed (see FIG. 81). In the above-described first and fourth embodiments, it is possible to enjoy whether the music selection button effect is executed by the operation on the enter button 21B for selecting a music.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in the first music determination, on condition that the unselected music is selected by operating the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the determination button 21B, A case where the music selection button effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, both the operation on the enter button 21B and the operation on the operation button 20 are valid as the enter operation for selecting the music. Specifically, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 18A and the second determination of the enter button operation data shown in FIG. 18F. When it is confirmed that one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for the music selection has been performed.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first and fourth embodiments, the music can be selected by operating the enter button 21B. In addition, unlike the above-described first and fourth embodiments, it is possible to select a music piece by operating the operation button 20. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the decision button 21B. That is, since the music selection button effect is executed by an operation different from that of the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, whether the music selection button effect is executed or not is determined according to the first embodiment described above. It is possible to have a different way of enjoying from the fourth embodiment.

In addition, although it may be suggested or clarified to the player in the symbol display portion 341 that the music selection button effect is executed by the operation of the operation button 20, by not making such suggestion or clarification (for example, By setting the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), it is possible to enjoy the music determination operation by the operation button 20 as a back command for executing the music selection button effect.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect process executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, the operation button 20 is operated between step S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect process of the first embodiment described above. It is determined whether or not a music piece is selected by (step S5201). Whether or not the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 is determined by, for example, whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. Then, in step S5201, when it is determined that the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), the 5R certainty variation selection button effect The determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R certainty variation selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906).

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the player issues an instruction to operate the decision button 21B in order to perform a decision operation, but the decision is made for the operation button 20 different from the instructed decision button 21B. By performing the operation, the music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, the interest in the act of selecting a music is improved.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed under the condition that the music is determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), but in this condition and the above-described first embodiment. The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the conditions (the operation of the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when the operation of the decision button 21B is started and when the operation of the operation button 20 is started.

In addition, in the case where either one of the condition in the present embodiment (decision operation for the operation button 20) and the condition in the above-described fourth embodiment (continuous hit operation or long press operation for the decision button 21B) is satisfied, You may make it perform a music selection button effect. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation of the operation button 20 is started and the timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when the condition in the present embodiment, the condition in the first embodiment, and the condition in the fourth embodiment are satisfied. May be.

Further, instead of the music being decided by the decision operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is produced when a long press operation or a continuous hit operation is performed on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). It may be performed.

Further, in the music selection button effect process of the present embodiment, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not an unselected music piece is selected. However, step S2901 is omitted, and even when the already selected music piece is selected, the music selection button effect May be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Outline of the Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplement and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the supplement is limited to a specific configuration with the reference is not. Further, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function described below and combine them arbitrarily.

[Appendix A1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
As the music selection image (83), it is temporarily indicated that the music can be selected by the player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting the music to be output by the audio output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and an already-selected music image (831) indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). Is displayed on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. A gaming machine characterized in that the played music is output as the selected music from the audio output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the already-selected music image indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as the music selection image for allowing the player to select the music is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can very easily find the image for selecting the already selected music from the music selection images when selecting the already selected music that has been selected before. Then, the player can temporarily select the already-selected music and display it as the temporarily-selected music image by operating the operation means while confirming the position of the already-selected music image in the music selection image. Further, by performing a determination operation on the operating means while the previously selected already selected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, the already selected music can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece that was previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means and output the already selected music piece from the audio output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix A2]
The effect execution means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83), which is less than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20"), in the image display means. The game machine according to Appendix A1, which is displayed at (341).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A2, in the case where a large number of music pieces are prepared so that the image display means cannot display them at one time, and a music piece selection image for a part of the plurality of music pieces is displayed. Even if there is, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) in a distinguishable manner. A game machine described in A2.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the temporarily-selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) displays the additional music image (832) on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831) to display the additional music image (832). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A3 or supplementary note A4, which is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix A6]
The effect execution means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a predetermined area of the image display means (341), thereby making the already-selected music image (832) the temporarily-selected music. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3 to A5, wherein the gaming machine is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable from the image (832).

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes A3 to A6, since the already selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the temporarily selected music image, it is easier to find the already selected music image from the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of the selected music image (831) selected from a number of 2 or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A6 to.

[Appendix A8]
A storage unit (512) for storing the selected music information about the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to appendix A7, characterized in that

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary note A7 and supplementary note A8, the image display means displays the selected music image of the upper limit number or less selected from the number of 2 or more. That is, since a plurality of already-selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of provisional selection and selection for a plurality of already-selected music that has been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, by setting an upper limit on the number of already-selected music images, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of already-selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music selected based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, and the operation load when selecting the selected music is reduced.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, wherein the storage means (512) stores only the last selected song as an already-selected song when the song is selected a plurality of times in the special gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A9, when the music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected music is set as the selected music. Therefore, even if a song is selected a plurality of times during the execution of one special game state, the final selected song becomes clear and the selected song image is occupied by the selected song for one special game state. It can be prevented from being done. In addition, for example, if you do not like the song you once selected and reselect another song, you can avoid that the song you did not like is displayed as the already-selected song image, and the reselected song is already selected. The convenience when selecting based on the music image is improved.

[Appendix A10]
The effect executing means (51), in the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in ascending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, which is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10, in the initially displayed music selection image, the already-selected music image for the newly-selected music having the selected date and time is displayed at a position close to the provisionally-selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the most recently selected already selected song when the song selection image is displayed, and can again select the most recently selected song by the number of times of operation on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when reselecting the most recently selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix A11]
In the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A11, the already-selected music image for the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection ratio within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected song that has been recently selected when the song selection image is displayed, and can reselect the song that has been recently selected with a small number of operations on the operating means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when re-selecting the recently selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix A12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display as music for which all of the upper limit number of the selected music image (831) are different, from the notes A7 to A11. The game machine according to any one.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A12, since the selected music image does not include a plurality of music images for the same music, even if an upper limit is set for the number of displayed selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit is displayed. Selected song images for a number of selected songs are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same song and wants to select a selected song other than the selected song, the player can easily find the selected song that he wants to select. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when reselecting the previously selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix A13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the insufficient number of the display number with respect to the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). The non-selected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) according to the above), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A7 to A12.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, even if the number of selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed instead of the selected music images. As a result, a prescribed number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The effect execution means (51),
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the already selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiable to the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A13 characterized by displaying.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the player can distinguish between the previously selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected. By operating the operation means while confirming, the unselected music can be temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations on the operation means and output the unselected music from the audio output means even when selecting the unselected music instead of the already selected music.

[Appendix A15]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) as the already-selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, which is displayed between the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means. Therefore, by changing the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, the player can select either the previously selected music that has been previously selected or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even when selecting the song, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix A16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) displays the plurality of initial temporary selection music pieces for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The game machine according to supplementary note A14 or supplementary note A15, wherein the gaming machine is selected from the unselected music pieces.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, the initial provisionally selected song is selected from the unselected songs, and the initial provisionally selected song that is the unselected song is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can secure the opportunity to convey.

[Appendix A17]
The tentatively selected song or the selected song is selected from the previously selected song and the unselected song, and the tentatively selected song or the selected song is voiced from different parts of the tentatively selected song or the selected song. The output means (26) outputs the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A14 to A16.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A17, the unselected music that has not been previously selected is changed to the already-selected music by performing the determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image. It is possible to cause the audio output means to output from a different part of the music from that selected. As a result, the player can listen to the selected song from different parts depending on whether the selected song is selected or the unselected song is selected. Therefore, the player outputs the selected song and the unselected song. It is possible to enjoy differently than when outputting music.

[Appendix A18]
When the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the already selected music, and the temporarily selected music is not yet recorded. The gaming machine according to appendix A17, characterized in that, in the case of a selected song, the audio output means (26) causes the unselected song to be output from the hook portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, the player can listen from the music start portion when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, while the player can hear it when the temporarily selected music is the unselected music. You can listen from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music selected from the beginning of the previously selected music with respect to the temporarily selected music. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the song that has not been selected before from the chorus portion with the highest excitement in the song, it is determined whether the temporarily selected song this time is a song of his or her preference. It will be easier.

[Appendix A19]
When the selected music is the already-selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the already-selected music from a music start portion, and the selected music is the unselected music. A game machine according to Appendix A17 or Appendix A18, characterized in that the voice output means (26) outputs the unselected music from the hook portion.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A19, the player can listen from the song start portion when the selected song is the already selected song, and from the chorus portion when the selected song is the unselected song. I can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music selected from the start of the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the song that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the most excitement in the song, so it is easy to determine whether or not the selected song is the song of his or her preference. Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player,
The effect execution means (51),
A display setting screen that enables setting of whether or not to display the already selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (88,98),
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting screen (88,98), when the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21), The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A19, characterized in that the display setting is performed according to a setting content set by a player.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A20, since it is possible to set whether to display the already-selected music image included in the music selection image, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. be able to. As a result, the player can select the music to be output from the sound output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by himself/herself. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the already selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the selected music image, for example, when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music selected by the previous player in the past. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding a setting history for the display setting;
The effect execution means (51) uses the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) on the image display means (341) in response to the player's operation on the operation means (21). ), the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
When the display setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), the game is played. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the person is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A21, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the display setting history screen. You can Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means when returning to the previous settings.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A21, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A22, the player can distinguish the setting history of the player who was playing the game from his/her own setting history by referring to the set time, and can also distinguish the setting history of himself/herself. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
Output for setting the output start from which of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to the player's setting operation on the operation means (21) for the temporarily selected music or the output start part of the selected music Further comprising a start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A22, characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the provisionally selected music piece or the output start portion of the selected music piece can be set. Therefore, the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means from a portion according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, the player can start the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her preference. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is more characteristic than other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song by selecting the tentatively selected song or the part for starting the output of the selected song from the song start portion and the chorus portion. This makes it easy to determine whether the song was a song that was never played or a song that was never heard before.

[Appendix A25]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding a setting history for the output start setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to a player's operation on the operation means (21). The output start setting history screen (87) displaying the setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the setting history image (871). In this case, the gaming machine according to supplementary note A23 or supplementary note A24, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A25, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. It can be set to start. Therefore, the player can perform desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means, for example, when returning to the previous setting.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A26, the player can distinguish the setting history of the player who was playing the game from his/her own setting history by referring to the set time, and can also distinguish the setting history of himself/herself. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
Music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information relating to music selection by a player,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner,
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output from the audio output means (26),
The music selection information storage means, as the music selection information, provisionally selected music information about the provisionally selected music, and already selected music that has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). And stored unselected music information about unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music,
The unselected music information is the initial temporary selected music image of the initial temporary selected music corresponding to the initial temporary selected music image first displayed on the image display means (341) as the temporary selected music image (832). A gaming machine characterized by including non-selected music information regarding a non-selected music that has not been selected by the player when displayed on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, the non-selected music information regarding the non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage means. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, it is possible to let the player recognize the information about the non-selected music through the rendering means such as the image display means. With this, the player can recognize which of the plurality of songs are non-selected songs, and thus, despite being displayed on the image display means (341) as the initial temporary selected song image, The troublesomeness of temporarily selecting or selecting unselected music that the player has not selected is released.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix B2]
An information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512),
Note that the information updating means (51) executes an update for clearing the information on the music corresponding to the selected music from the non-selected music information when the selected music is the non-selected music. The game machine described in B1.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B2, since the non-selected music is treated as the other music by selecting the non-selected music, the music selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as the non-selected music image. It is avoided to be continued. This prevents the player from mistakenly selecting the previously selected music as a non-selected music and avoiding the selection of the music unintentionally.

[Appendix B3]
Note that the information updating means (51) executes updating when the selected song is the non-selected song, the already-selected song information includes information about a song corresponding to the selected song. A gaming machine described in B2.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B3, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the previously selected music piece is a non-selected music piece, and the selected music piece corresponding to the music piece is treated because the music piece is treated as the selected music piece. The image will be displayed on the image display means. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent unintentionally avoiding the selection of the music.

[Appendix B4]
The effect execution means (51),
As the music selection image (83), at least the temporarily selected music image (832), a selected music image (831) indicating the selected music, and an unselected music indicating the unselected music. The image (833) and the image display means (341) are displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the unselected music image (833) includes an identifiable non-selected music image (834) indicating the non-selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B4, since the image including the non-selected music image is displayed as the unselected music image, the player does not select it although it was first displayed as the temporarily selected music image in the past. Since the selected non-selected music can be distinguished from other music, it is possible to more reliably prevent the player from unintentionally temporarily selecting the non-selected music. In addition, by displaying the non-selected music image, you can search for new favorite music while avoiding non-selected music, so even if music selection is limited to a relatively short time, that time limit can be set. You can use it effectively to find a new favorite song.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, since the already-selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection image, the player can not only distinguish the already-selected music and the unselected music but also recognize the already-selected music. Regardless of whether to select a music piece or an unselected music piece, the target music piece can be easily and efficiently selected with a small number of operations on the operation means and output from the audio output means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect executing means (51) has a predetermined upper limit number of pre-unselected music images (831) selected from a number of 2 or more based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means. ) Is displayed on the image display means (341), the gaming machine described in Appendix B4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the upper limit is set to the number of non-selected music images, which prevents an excessive number of non-selected music images from being displayed, and unnecessarily selects non-selected music. The risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect execution means (51) arranges and displays the non-selected music images (834) corresponding to the upper limit number of non-selected music in positions distant from the provisionally selected music image (832) in the order of new non-selected date and time. The gaming machine described in appendix B5.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B6, since the non-selected music image for the new non-selected music with the non-selected date and time is displayed at a position far from the temporarily selected music image, the non-selected music not selected most recently is selected. It is possible to reduce the risk of being lost.

[Appendix B7]
The effect execution means (51),
A predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) that are smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20") are displayed on the image display means (341),
In the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), the non-selected music image (834) is not displayed on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B4 to B6, characterized in that the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) in accordance with.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image first displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, unselected music is unlikely to be selected by the player. Therefore, by not displaying the non-selected music image in the initial music selection image, the unselected music (excluding the non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than the non-selected music is displayed in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to select a music piece from the unselected music pieces excluding the non-selected music pieces, and reduce the stress on the player in the music piece selection. On the other hand, since the player can display the non-selected music image by operating the operation means, the player can also select the music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
An initial music arrangement determining means (51) for determining an initial arrangement of the plurality of music in order to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341),
The effect execution means (51) displays the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) according to the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determination means (51),
The initial music arrangement determining means (51) is arranged to perform the non-selection at a position in the initial arrangement where the minimum number of operations on the operating means (21) necessary for making the non-selected music the temporary selected music is the largest. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes B4 to B7, wherein the musical pieces are arranged.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8, the minimum number of operations of the operating means necessary for making the non-selected music less likely to be selected by the player (more likely to be selected by the player) to be the temporarily selected music. Are arranged in the position where there are the most. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, in the initial song selection image, more unselected songs (excluding non-selected songs) that are more likely to be selected by the player than the unselected songs can be displayed. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to select a music piece from the unselected music pieces other than the non-selected music piece, and reduce the stress on the player in selecting the music piece.

[Appendix B9]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the unselected music image (834) according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player,
The effect execution means (51),
A display setting screen that enables setting of whether or not to display the unselected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (88,98),
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting screen (88,98), when the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21), The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B4 to B8, characterized in that the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

With the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player selects a music selection image that does not include a non-selected music image when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player has not selected in the past. Can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding a setting history for the display setting;
The effect execution means (51) uses the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) on the image display means (341) in response to the player's operation on the operation means (21). ), the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), if the player performs a setting operation to perform the display setting based on the setting history image (881), The gaming machine according to Appendix B9, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B10, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the display setting history screen. You can Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means when returning to the previous settings.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B11, the player can distinguish, for example, the setting history of the player who was playing the game before from the setting history of himself, by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
The effect executing means (51) initially displays the temporarily selected music image (832) as the temporarily selected music image (832) when the music selection image (83) is first displayed on the image display means (341). 832) is selected from the unselected songs initial provisionally selected music, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the audio output means (26), the gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B11. ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B12, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial temporarily selected music to be first displayed as the temporarily selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. It Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected songs, it is possible for the player to hear the unselected song as the initial tentatively selected song in the process up to that point. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B12, wherein the effect executing means (51) selects the initial provisionally selected music from music other than the non-selected music among the unselected music.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B13, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from the non-selected music among the unselected music. Therefore, the player selects the non-selected music, which was previously selected by the performance executing means as the temporarily selected music but not selected by the player, by the performance executing means and is displayed as the initial temporarily selected music image. Freed from the hassle of doing things.

[Appendix C1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Display the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output from the audio output means (26),
The tentatively selected song or the selected song, depending on whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is an already selected song that has already been selected by the player or an unselected song other than the already selected song. A game machine characterized by causing the voice output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from different portions.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a music start portion when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine described in appendix C1.

[Appendix C3]
The performance executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the hook portion when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine described in Additional Note C1 or Additional Note C2.

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes C1 to C3, the selected musical composition is output from different portions of the musical composition depending on whether the already selected musical composition is temporarily selected or selected and the unselected musical composition is provisionally selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporarily selected music or the selected music from different parts depending on whether the already selected music is temporarily selected or selected and the temporarily selected or unselected music is selected. For example, if the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the already selected song, the already selected song can be heard from the beginning of the song, and if the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the unselected song is selected. You can listen from the part. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy from the music start portion of the selected music that has been heard before in the chorus part. On the other hand, with respect to a song that has not been selected before, it is possible to listen to the chorus portion of the song that has the highest excitement, so that it is easy to determine whether the song is one that one likes.

[Appendix C4]
The effect executing means (51) first displays the temporarily selected music image (832) as the temporarily selected music image (832) when the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341). ) Is selected from the unselected songs of the plurality of songs, the gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C3.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from a hook portion.

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes C4 and C5, when the music selection image is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be displayed first as the temporarily selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, the hook portion. From the voice output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already selected songs, it is possible to let the player listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point. In particular, when the initially provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part, the chorus part with the highest excitement of the unselected music can be heard without fail, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

[Appendix C6]
Output for setting the output start from which of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to the player's setting operation on the operation means (21) for the temporarily selected music or the output start part of the selected music Further comprising a start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes C1 to C5, characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected song or the selected song is performed according to the setting content set by the player. ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, since the temporarily selected music or the output start portion of the selected music can be set, the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from a portion according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, the player can start the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her preference. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is more characteristic than other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song by selecting the tentatively selected song or the part for starting the output of the selected song from the song start portion and the chorus portion. This makes it easy to determine whether the song was a song that was never played or a song that was never heard before.

[Appendix C8]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding an output start setting history for the output start setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to a player's operation on the operation means (21). The output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512) is displayed,
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to supplementary note C6 or supplementary note C7, characterized in that, when made, the output start setting of the contents set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note C8, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. It can be set to start. Therefore, the player can perform desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means, for example, when returning to the previous setting.

[Appendix C9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C8, wherein the effect execution means (51) causes the output start setting history screen (87) to display the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time. ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note C9, the player can distinguish the output start setting history of the player who was playing the game and the output start setting history of his/her own by referring to the set time. Moreover, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Display the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output from the audio output means (26),
A game machine characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is set in advance, the provisionally selected music being output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at the timing when the determination operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D1, the provisionally selected music is continuously output when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage, and the same portion of the music is output in duplicate in a short time from the temporary selection stage to the music selection stage. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort or disgust when the music is interrupted and the chorus portion of the same music is duplicated in a short time.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected song is the already selected song.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent duplicate chorus parts of the same song from being output in a short time from the stage of tentative selection to the stage of song selection. It can be suppressed.

[Appendix D3]
When the provisionally selected music piece is the already selected music piece, the effect performing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to start a music piece of the already selected music piece (for example, a singing portion (A melody portion)). The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the gaming machine outputs the intro portion (prelude portion).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D3, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is output from the music start portion, and when the selected music is the already selected music, the temporarily selected music continues. Is output. That is, when the selected music is selected, it is output from the music start portion in the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage without interruption. Therefore, not only is it possible to prevent the chorus portion of the same song from being output in duplicate in a short time from the selection stage to the song selection stage, but at least the tune start portion of the already selected song at the tentative selection stage. You can definitely listen. In addition, since the selected music is continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion to the chorus portion and maintain the tension high.

[Appendix D4]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a second special gaming state (16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) in which a game time is longer than the first special gaming state. Including
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D4, in the first special game state in which the game time is short, the player performs the deciding operation on the tentatively selected musical piece output from the audio output means at the timing when the deciding operation is performed. You can continue to listen from the part that was output when it was broken. That is, in the first special game state, the same portion of the music is output during both the temporary selection of the music and after the selection of the music during the short game time, and the music is output from a different portion after the selection of the music. It has been avoided. As a result, since the music can be continuously listened to within a short playing time, the music can be enjoyed without stress even during the short playing time.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D4, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the voice output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music piece from a hook portion in the first special game state.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D5, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to let the player hear the climax part having the highest excitement with respect to the temporarily selected song, so that even if the player has a short playing time, You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected song. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax part of the temporarily selected music with high excitement, it becomes easy to determine whether the temporarily selected music is his or her favorite music or a music that was previously selected and liked. Also, by outputting the temporarily selected music from the hook portion when the game state is the first special game state, the player can surely listen to the hook portion after the music is selected after the temporary selection, and at the same time, the hook portion can be heard. You can listen to music continuously without stress.

[Appendix D6]
In the second special game state, the effect execution means (51) causes the voice output means (26) to output the selected music to a music start portion (for example, a singing start portion (A melody portion) when the determination operation is performed. ), the intro part (prelude part)) is output from the additional note D4 or the additional note D5.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected song is output from the song start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state where the game time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed, from the music start portion again. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time is long, it is possible to fully enjoy the music including the chorus part of the music from the music start portion.

[Appendix D7]
The effect execution means (51) causes the voice output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music piece from a music piece start portion in the second special game state. The game machine described.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D7, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected song is output from the song start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state where the game time is long, the player can hear the music output from the sound output means when the determination operation is performed, from the music start portion again. In other words, in the second special game state, it is possible to fully enjoy the music including the chorus portion of the music from the music start portion because the game time is long. On the other hand, when the game state is the first special game state, the temporarily selected music piece is output from the music piece start portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the game state is the first special game state or the second special game state, depending on whether the temporarily selected song is output from the chorus part or the song start part. is there. In addition, the first special game state and the second special game state are different in game time, and generally, the longer the game time, the higher the expected game value tends to be. Therefore, the player can enjoy by paying attention to the output start portion of the temporarily selected music in order to determine whether or not the second special game state is more generally advantageous for the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect execution means (51) has already selected the music selection image (83) indicating that the music is already selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the music image (831) is further displayed on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D8, the player operates the operation unit while confirming the position of the selected music image in the music selection image to temporarily select the selected music and display it as the temporarily selected music image. Can be made. Further, by performing a determination operation on the operating means while the previously selected already selected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, the already selected music can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece that was previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means and output the already selected music piece from the audio output means.

[Appendix D9]
The effect execution means (51),
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the already selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiable to the image display means (341). To display
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), a plurality of initial temporary selection musics for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the temporary selection music image (832) are displayed. The game machine according to Appendix D8, wherein the game machine is selected from the unselected music pieces among the above music pieces.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D9, when the music selection image is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be first displayed as the temporarily selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. .. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can secure the opportunity to convey.

[Appendix D10]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
An output start setting means for performing output start setting of whether to start output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a music start part or a chorus part according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player ( 51) is further provided,
The effect execution means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D9, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

With the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, the player can set the output start of the temporarily selected music or the selected music. Therefore, the player can output the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the favorite portion by setting the output start portion.

[Appendix D11]
Further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information relating to the output start setting history for the output start setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to a player's operation on the operation means (21). The output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is an operation for the player to perform the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871B). The game machine according to Note D10, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed when the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D11, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. It can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D12]
The game machine according to Note D11, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871B) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D12, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who was playing the game before and the output start setting history of his own by referring to the set time, for example. Moreover, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Display the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output from the audio output means (26),
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the player may have already selected the temporarily selected music as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected song other than the selected song, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected song from the chorus part,
A game machine characterized in that, when the selected music is the unselected music, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music from a music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, the temporarily selected music piece is output from the hook portion, and the selected music piece is output from the music piece start portion. Therefore, when an unselected song that has not been selected before is selected, it is possible to let the player hear the song start portion and the chorus portion of the unselected song, so that the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song sufficiently. Can be told. On the other hand, the player does not listen to the chorus portion that has already been output at the stage of temporary selection in a short time, and even if the special game takes a short time, the unselected song that is the selected song can be played. After selecting the music, you can listen to it from the beginning of the music, and you can check again whether the unselected music suits your taste.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix E2]
The effect execution means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83), which is less than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20"), in the image display means. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, which is displayed at (341).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, in the case where a large number of music pieces cannot be displayed at one time on the image display means and a music piece selection image for a part of the plurality of music pieces is displayed. Even if there is, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect execution means (51) displays the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) indicating the temporarily selected music on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner. The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 or Appendix E2.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the temporarily-selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
The effect execution means (51) displays an additional image indicating the selected music on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831), as described in Appendix E3 or Appendix E4. Game machine.

[Appendix E6]
The effect execution means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a predetermined area of the image display means (341), according to any one of the notes E3 to E5. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes E3 to E6, the already-selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the temporarily-selected music image, so that it is easier to find the already-selected music image from the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
Note E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of the selected music image (831) selected from two or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E6 to.

[Appendix E8]
A storage unit (512) for storing the selected music information about the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine described in appendix E7, which is characterized by:

According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes E7 and E8, in the special game state, the image selection means displays the music selection images including the selected music images of not more than the upper limit number selected from 2 or more. That is, a plurality of already-selected music images can be displayed. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of already-selected music image, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of already-selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music selected based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, and the operation load when selecting the selected music is reduced.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E8, wherein the storage unit (512) sets only the last selected song as an already-selected song when the song is selected a plurality of times in the special game state.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E9, when the music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected music is set as the selected music. Therefore, even if a song is selected a plurality of times during the execution of one special game state, the final selected song becomes clear and the selected song image is occupied by the selected song for one special game state. It can be prevented from being done. In addition, for example, if you do not like the song you once selected and reselect another song, you can avoid that the song you did not like is displayed as the already-selected song image, and the reselected song is already selected. The convenience when selecting based on the music image is improved.

[Appendix E10]
In the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the already-selected music images (831) in descending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E10, in the initially displayed music selection image, the already-selected music image for the newly-selected music of the selected date and time is displayed at a position close to the temporarily-selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the most recently selected already selected song when the song selection image is displayed, and can again select the most recently selected song by the number of times of operation on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when reselecting the most recently selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix E11]
In the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the already selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E11, the already-selected music image for the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection ratio within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected song that has been recently selected when the song selection image is displayed, and can reselect the song that has been recently selected with a small number of operations on the operating means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when re-selecting the recently selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix E12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display as the music for which all of the upper limit number of the selected music image (831) are different, from the remarks E7 to E11. The game machine according to any one.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix E12, since the selected music image does not include a plurality of music for the same music, even if an upper limit is set for the number of displayed selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit is displayed. Selected song images for a number of selected songs are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same song and wants to select a selected song other than the selected song, the player can easily find the selected song that he wants to select. As a result, the player can reduce the operation load when reselecting the previously selected song, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix E13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the insufficient number of the display number with respect to the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). ), the unselected music image (833) is displayed as a music selection image (83) indicating the unselected music, the gaming machine according to any one of E7 to E12. ..

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note E13, even when the number of selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed instead of the selected music images. As a result, a prescribed number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The effect execution means (51),
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating the unselected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E13.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E14, the player can distinguish between the previously selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected, so that the unselected music image can be recognized. By operating the operation means while confirming, the unselected music can be temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations on the operation means and output the unselected music from the audio output means even when selecting the unselected music instead of the already selected music.

[Appendix E15]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) as the already-selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Appendix E14, which is displayed between the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E15, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means. Therefore, by changing the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, the player can select either the previously selected music that has been previously selected or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even when selecting the song, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix E16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) displays the plurality of initial temporary selection music pieces for the initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The game machine according to any one of appendixes E1 to E15, wherein the gaming machine is selected from the unselected songs.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E16, the initial provisionally selected song is selected from the unselected songs, and the initial provisionally selected song, which is the unselected song, is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can enjoy the goodness of the unselected song. Can secure the opportunity to convey.

[Appendix E17]
The tentatively selected song or the selected song is selected from the previously selected song and the unselected song, and the tentatively selected song or the selected song is voiced from different parts of the tentatively selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes E1 to E16, wherein the gaming machine outputs the output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E17, the unselected music that has not been previously selected is changed to the already-selected music by performing the determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image. It is possible to cause the audio output means to output from a different part of the music from that selected. As a result, the player can listen to the selected song from different parts depending on whether the selected song is selected or the unselected song is selected. Therefore, the player outputs the selected song and the unselected song. It is possible to enjoy differently than when outputting music.

[Appendix E18]
The effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the already selected music when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, in Appendix E17. The game machine described.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E18, the player can listen to the music from the music start portion when the temporarily selected music is an already selected music, while the player can hear it when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music. You can listen from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music selected from the beginning of the previously selected music with respect to the temporarily selected music. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the song that has not been selected before from the chorus portion with the highest excitement in the song, it is determined whether the temporarily selected song this time is a song of his or her preference. It will be easier.

[Appendix E19]
When the selected music is the already-selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the already-selected music from the music start portion, and the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E17 or supplementary note E18, wherein the unselected music piece is output from the hook portion to the audio output means (26) in some cases.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E19, the player can listen from the song start portion when the selected song is the already selected song, and from the chorus portion when the selected song is the unselected song. I can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music selected from the start of the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the song that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the most excitement in the song, so it is easy to determine whether or not the selected song is the song of his or her preference. Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player,
The effect execution means (51),
A display setting screen that enables setting of whether or not to display the already selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (88,98),
In the case where the display setting means (51) performs the setting operation by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is changed to the display setting screen (88, 98). The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes E3 to E13, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E20, it is possible to set whether to display the specific image included in the music selection image, and thus it is possible to display the music selection image on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. it can. As a result, the player can select the music to be output from the sound output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by himself/herself. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the already selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the selected music image, for example, when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music selected by the previous player in the past. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing display setting history information relating to display setting history for the display setting;
The effect execution means (51) uses the display setting storage means (512) as the display setting screen (88, 98) on the image display means (341) in response to the player's operation on the operation means (21). ), the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in
When the display setting means (51) performs a setting operation to perform the display setting based on the display setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88). The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E21, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the display setting history screen. You can Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means when returning to the previous settings.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to appendix E21, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E22, the player can distinguish the display setting history of the player who was playing the game and his/her own display setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a display setting history to be selected in its own display setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
Output for setting the output start from which of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to the player's setting operation on the operation means (21) for the temporarily selected music or the output start part of the selected music Further comprising a start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The game according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E22, characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected musical piece or the selected musical piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. Machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E23, the provisionally selected music or the output start portion of the selected music can be set, so that the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output unit from a portion according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to appendix E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E24, the player can start the output of the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the music piece start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her preference. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is more characteristic than other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song by selecting the tentatively selected song or the part for starting the output of the selected song from the song start portion and the chorus portion. This makes it easy to determine whether the song was a song that was never played or a song that was never heard before.

[Appendix E25]
Further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information relating to the output start setting history for the output start setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in response to a player's operation on the operation means (21). The output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to supplementary note E23 or supplementary note E24, characterized in that, when made, the output start setting of the contents set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E25, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen of the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. It can be set to start. Therefore, the player can perform desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means, for example, when returning to the previous setting.

[Appendix E26]
The gaming machine according to appendix E25, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). ..

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E26, the player can distinguish the output start setting history of the player who was playing the game and the output start setting history of his/her own by referring to the set time. Moreover, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music selectable by at least a determination operation of the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Display the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341),
The temporary selection music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the temporarily selected music is temporarily selected. The selected music is output to the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
Causing the audio output means (26) to start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from a first part of a plurality of predetermined output start parts,
When the actual game situation is a game situation that is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means, a plurality of the voice output means (26) are provided with a predetermined condition. A game machine characterized in that the output of the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is started from a second part of the output start part different from the first part.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, although the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the first part, in a game situation where the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second part different from the first part. That is, the player outputs a provisionally selected music piece or a selected music piece from the second portion different from the first portion, so that the player can enjoy the game situation in which the current game situation is more advantageous than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. You can get to know the situation. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting the music is not an act of simply temporarily selecting or selecting the music, but a game situation in which the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. As a result, the player can be actively motivated to temporarily select or select a song, and the player can be actively participated in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming state is a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability that the main control means (41) determines to shift the gaming state to the special gaming state is higher than the first gaming state. Including the special game state,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the game state is shifted to the first game state after the special game state is finished, and the game state is changed to the second game state after the special game state is finished. Including the second special game state to be transferred,
The effect execution means (51), on condition that the game state suggested by the effect means is the first special game state and the actual game state is the second special game state, the temporarily selected music piece. Alternatively, the game machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the selected music piece is output from the second portion to the audio output unit (26).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the selected music piece is output from the second part. That is, when the player selects a song, the selected song is output from the second portion, so that the current special game state is the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. You can get to know that. Therefore, enjoy the deciding operation for selecting a music as an act of confirming whether the second special game state is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, not the act of simply selecting the music. You can As a result, the player can be motivated to actively select the music, and the player can be actively participated in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The effect execution means (51) has already selected the temporary selection music or the selected music as a music to be output by the audio output means (26) among the plurality of music. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2, characterized in that the sound output means (26) causes the second portion to output the temporarily selected musical piece or the selected musical piece, provided that it is an unselected musical piece other than a musical piece. ..

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note F3, the selected song is output from the second portion on condition that the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the unselected song in the second special game state. That is, when the player tentatively selects or selects an unselected music piece, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second portion, so that the actual game situation is higher than the game situation suggested by the production means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting a music can be enjoyed as an operation for confirming whether or not the game situation is advantageous to the player, rather than simply as an operation for temporarily selecting or selecting a music. As a result, it is possible to give the player the motivation to positively select or select the unselected music and make the unselected music heard, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

[Appendix F4]
When the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a hook portion, and the temporarily selected music or the second portion of the selected music is The game machine described in Appendix F3, which is a music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, while the first portion is the hook portion, and the second portion is the music start portion that is clearly different from the first portion, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second. It is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort when the data is output from the portion. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F5]
When the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the first portion of the temporarily selected song or the selected song is a song start portion, and the temporarily selected song or the second part of the selected song Is a hook portion, the gaming machine described in Appendix F3.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, while the first portion is the music start portion, and the second portion is a hook portion that is clearly different from the first portion, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second. It is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort when the data is output from the portion. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F6]
The effect execution means (51) is provided with the condition that the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is an already selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as a music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 or Appendix F2, characterized in that the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note F6, even when the already selected music piece is temporarily selected or selected, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second portion. That is, when the player tentatively selects or selects the already selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion, so that the actual game situation is more likely than the game situation suggested by the production means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected music can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether the game situation is advantageous to the player, not an act of simply selecting a music.

[Appendix F7]
When the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the first portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a music start portion, and the second portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a chorus portion. The gaming machine according to appendix F6, characterized in that there is.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the first portion is the song start portion, while the second portion is a hook portion that is clearly different from the first portion, so that the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the second song. It is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort when the data is output from the portion. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music is the already selected music, the first portion of the selected music is a continuation of the temporarily selected music output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determining operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix F6, wherein the second portion of the selected song is a hook portion or a song start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, while the first part is the continuation part of the selected song, the second part is the hook part or the song start part which is clearly different from the first part, so that the selected song is It is possible to give a clear discomfort to the player when it is output from the second part. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F9]
The effect execution means (51) initially displays the temporary selection music image (832) as the temporary selection music image (832) when the temporary selection music piece displays the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341). Any of Supplementary Notes F1 to F8, characterized in that the audio output means (26) is caused to output the temporarily selected music piece from the second portion on condition that the music piece image (832) is an initially temporarily selected music piece. Gaming machine described in.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F9, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the second portion when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means, even if the player does not perform any operation on the operation means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player who does not perform the temporary selection or selection of the music that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means.

[Appendix F10]
The special gaming state is a third special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a fourth special gaming state (16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) in which a game time is longer than the third special gaming state. Including
The effect execution means (51),
In the third special game state, cause the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected song or the selected song from the first portion,
In the fourth special game state, the provisionally selected music is provided on condition that a suggestion production suggesting that the production means (26, 341, etc.) is in the third special game state is being performed. Alternatively, the game machine described in Appendix F1 is characterized in that the audio output means (26) outputs the selected music piece from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, the provisionally selected song or the selected song is the second part on condition that the suggestion effect suggesting that the game is in the third special game state is executed in the fourth special game state. Is output from. That is, the player outputs the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second part, so that the current special game state is the fourth special game state in which the game time is longer than the third special game state, that is, It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the act of temporarily selecting or selecting a music as an act of confirming whether or not it is in the fourth special game state in which the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is higher than that in the third special game state. it can.

[Appendix F11]
When the gaming state is the fourth special gaming state, the temporarily selected song or the first portion of the selected song is a song start portion, and the temporarily selected song or the second portion of the selected song is a hook portion. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F10 or supplementary note F11, wherein when the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the temporarily selected music piece is a hook portion.

[Appendix F13]
When the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the selected music piece is a continuation portion of the portion output from the voice output means (26) at the timing when the determining operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10 or Supplementary Note F11.

According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F11 to Supplementary Note 13, in the fourth special game state, while the first portion of the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the song start portion, the second portion of the temporarily selected song or the selected song is Since the hook portion is clearly different from the first portion, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort when the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second portion. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F14]
The effect execution means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music piece from the second part by a lottery performed by the determination operation of the operation means by the player as a trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F13 to.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, a gaming situation in which the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation suggested by the rendering means (for example, a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) gaming state) (for example, a probability variation jackpot gaming state ), the contradiction of the output start portion of the selected music can be generated by a simple control of lottery by the determination operation for selecting the music.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to appendix F14, wherein the number of times of the lottery is provided with a predetermined upper limit number for one execution of the special game.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting songs in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The effect execution means (51),
It enables selection of music to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection valid period in the special gaming state,
That it is planned to execute the promotion effect that clearly shows that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means after the selection effective period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F15, characterized in that the audio output means (26) is caused to output the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, the temporary selection music or the selected music is output from the second portion when the music is temporarily selected or selected within the selection valid period, which is suggested by the rendering means. It is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporary selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix G1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51) is a music selection operation that suggests or clearly indicates the game state, provided that the player performs a decision operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by causing the production means (26, 341, etc.) to execute an effect (indication effect 1 to suggestion effect 8, fixed effect 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, a music selection operation effect that suggests or clearly indicates the game state is executed by the player's determination operation on the operation means for selecting a song. Therefore, the player can enjoy the deciding operation for selecting the music as an act for confirming the game state based on the music selecting operation effect, instead of merely selecting the music. As a result, it is possible to give the player motivation to actively select a song, and allow the player to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix G2]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state), and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state). ) Is included,
The music selection operation effect is an expectation suggestion effect (indication effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) that indicates the degree of expectation that the game state is the second game state, or the game state is the second game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, which is a confirmed effect (determined effects 1 to 4) that clearly indicates that.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state, or a confirmed production that clearly shows that the gaming state is the second special gaming state. By performing the setting to be executed, the expectation degree suggesting effect or the finalizing effect is executed by the determination operation of the operation means by the player for selecting the music. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting a music is not an act of simply selecting a music, but an act of confirming the degree of expectation of being in the second special game state based on the expectation suggestion effect or the confirmed effect. Can be enjoyed as
On the other hand, by setting not to execute the expectation suggesting effect or the final effect, the expectation suggesting effect or the final effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game while expecting that the game state is the second special game state without being overwhelmed by the contents of the music selection operation effect.

[Appendix G3]
The effect execution means (51) is provided on condition that the selected music piece is an unselected music piece other than the already selected music piece that has been already selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1 or supplementary note G2, characterized in that the production means (26, 341, etc.) is caused to execute the music selection operation production (indication production 1 to suggestion production 8, final production 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, the music selection operation effect is executed on condition that an unselected music piece is selected. Therefore, the player who desires to execute the music selection operation effect is positively unselected. The selected music can be selected. This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various music prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect producing means (51), when selecting a music piece from the music piece selection image, on the condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long-press operation is performed on the operation means (21), the effect producing means (26). , 341, etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes G1 to G3.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state because the player performs a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation on the operating means when selecting a song. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggesting effect that suggests is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a music is not limited to simply selecting a music, and by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation, the expectation of being in the second special game state based on the music selection operation effect such as the expectation suggestion effect You can also enjoy it as an act to confirm. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect execution means (51),
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by the player to select a music piece from the music selection image (83), (83) together with the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, it is expected that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by the determination operation being performed on the operating means different from the operating means instructed to select the music. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation indicating effect that indicates the degree is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a music is not limited to simply selecting a music, and the second special game state is achieved based on a music selection operation effect such as an expectation suggestion effect by operating an operation means different from the instructed operation means. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm the degree of expectation of a thing. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music.

[Appendix G6]
The effect execution means (51), when the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined selection effective period in the special game state, the music selection operation effect (indication effect 1 to The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G5, characterized in that the demonstration means (26, 341, etc.) is caused to perform the suggestive demonstration 8, the finalized demonstrations 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, the music selection operation effect such as the expectation suggestion effect is executed by performing the determination operation for the selection of the music in the predetermined period, so that the music selection is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music item. It is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music in order to confirm whether or not the operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G7]
The effect executing means (51), when the number of times the determining operation is performed on the operating means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the music selection operation effect (indication effect 1 to suggestion effect 8). , The finalized effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.), the gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G1 to Appendix G6.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G7, since the music selection operation effect is executed when the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, without sufficiently listening to the selected music, It is possible to prevent unnecessary selection of music from being repeated in order to confirm whether or not the selection operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G8]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
And a production execution setting means (51) for performing production execution setting as to whether the production means (341 etc.) is to execute the music selection operation production.
The effect execution means (51), the effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting of the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G7, characterized in that the performance execution setting for the music selection operation performance is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G8, since it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection operation effect, it is possible to execute the music selection operation effect in accordance with the player's preference. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix G9]
And a production execution setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding production execution setting history for the production execution setting.
The effect execution setting means (51) stores the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the effect execution setting history information stored in (512) is displayed.
The production execution setting means (51) is a setting operation for performing the production execution setting by the player based on the production execution setting history image (891) when the display screen is the production execution setting history screen (89). The game machine according to supplementary note G8, characterized in that, when the game is performed, the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G9, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, thereby producing the same effect as the previous effect execution setting. Execution settings can be set. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, he/she can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note G9, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). ..

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G10, the player can distinguish, for example, the effect execution setting history of the player who was playing the game before from the effect execution setting history of himself by referring to the set time. Moreover, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in its own effect execution setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H1]
A main control means (41) for judging whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
A game execution means (37) for executing a game according to the determination result of the main control means (41),
A holding means (41) for holding the right to execute the game by the game executing means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Hold storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold game held by the holding means (41),
Image display means (341) for performing an effect by an image, and effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) for executing an effect for outputting music,
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music from the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51) includes one that shifts the game state to the special game state after executing the hold game in the determination result for the hold game stored in the hold storage means (412). In case of being, after execution of the holding game in the determination result for the holding game stored in the holding storage means (412) on condition that a determination operation for the operating means (21) by the player is performed. It is characterized in that the production means (26, 341, etc.) is caused to execute a special effect (fixed effect 2 and finalized effect 4) that suggests or clearly indicates that a thing for shifting the game state to the special game state is included. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, a so-called holding condominium is performed in which the game state is shifted to the special game state after the holding game is executed by the determination operation of the operating means by the player for selecting the music. The special effect shown can be executed. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting the music can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting the music but as an act for confirming whether the holding condominium is executed based on the special effect. This allows the player to actively select the music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix H2]
The effect producing means (51), when selecting a music piece from the music piece selection image, on the condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long-press operation is performed on the operation means (21), the effect producing means (26). , 341, etc.) causes the special effect (determined effect 2 and confirmed effect 4) to be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2, when the player selects a music piece, the player performs a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation on the operating means, thereby changing the gaming state to the special gaming state after the execution of the holding game. It is possible to execute a special effect indicating that a so-called holding holiday game is performed, which is performed by shifting to. Therefore, the act of selecting a song is not limited to simply selecting a song, but can be enjoyed as an action for confirming whether or not the holding condominium is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect execution means (51),
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by the player to select a music piece from the music selection image (83), (83) together with the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect operation means. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1 or Supplementary Note H2.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H3, when the determination operation is performed on an operating means different from the operating means instructed to select the music, the special game state is set after the execution of the holding game. A special effect indicating that a so-called holding holiday game is performed, which is a transition to the game state, can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a song is not limited to simply selecting a song, but can be enjoyed as an action for confirming whether or not the holding condominium is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the music. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest degree of the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

[Appendix H4]
The effect execution means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341, etc.) to execute the special effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) on condition that the selected song is the unselected song. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H3.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the special effect is executed on condition that the unselected music piece is selected. Therefore, the player who wants to execute the special effect piece actively selects the unselected music piece. Can be selected. This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various music prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the determining operation is performed on the operating means (21) during a predetermined period of time in the special game state. 26, 341, etc.) is executed, the gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H4.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the special effect is executed on condition that the decision operation for selection of the music is performed in the predetermined period, so that the special effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. It is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music for confirming whether or not the selection.

[Appendix H6]
The effect execution means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. , 341, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H5.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H6, the special effect is executed on condition that the number of times the decision operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, so that the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. It is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music in order to confirm whether or not the special effect is executed.

[Appendix H7]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting the effect in the special game state,
And a production execution setting unit (51) for performing production execution setting as to whether the production unit (341 or the like) is to execute the special production.
The effect execution means (51), the effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting of the display screen of the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H6, characterized in that, when any of the above is performed, the production execution setting for the special production is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H7, since it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, the special effect can be executed in accordance with the player's preference. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix H8]
Further, a production execution setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding a setting history for the production execution setting,
The effect execution setting means (51) stores the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The setting execution history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512) is displayed,
The effect execution setting means (51), when the display screen is moved to the effect execution setting history screen (89), a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting by the player based on the setting history image (891). The gaming machine according to appendix H7, characterized in that, when made, the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H8, the player performs the setting operation for the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, thereby producing the same effect as the previous effect execution setting. Execution settings can be set. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, he/she can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to appendix H8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image showing a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, the player can distinguish the production execution setting history of the player who was playing the game and his/her own production execution setting history by referring to the set time, for example. Moreover, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in its own effect execution setting history, it becomes easy to have a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

10: Gaming machine 20: Operation button 20a: Operation switch 21: Selection determination unit 21A: Selection button 211: Up selection button 212: Down selection button 213: Left selection button 214: Right selection buttons 211a to 211d: Selection operation switch 21B: Enter button 21Ba: Enter operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: Music selection image 831: Selected music image 832: Temporarily selected music image 833: Unselected music image 834: Non-selected music image

Claims (1)

Main control means for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
An image display unit for performing an effect by an image, and an effect unit including an audio output unit for executing an effect for outputting a music,
A music selection image for allowing the player to select a music to be output from the plurality of music by the voice output means is displayed on the image display means, and the music selected by the player based on the music selection image is output as the voice. Means for outputting to the means,
Operation means operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means based on the music selection image displayed by the image display means,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
As the music selection image, at least the temporarily selected music image indicating that the music selection image is a provisionally selected music that can be selected by the player's determination operation on the operation device for selecting the music to be output by the audio output device. To display
In response to an operation on the operation means by the player, change the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image,
When the temporarily selected music image is displayed on the image display means, the audio output means outputs the temporarily selected music, and the music temporarily selected when the determination operation is performed is selected as the selected music. Output from voice output means,
When the temporarily selected music image is displayed on the image display means, the temporarily selected music is an unselected music other than the already selected music that has been already selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means. In this case, let the audio output unit output the unselected music from the chorus part,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the selected music is the unselected music, the voice output means outputs the unselected music from a music start portion.